Jeep 2020 Compass Oil Reset Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for Jeep models including: 2020 Compass Oil Reset, 2020, Compass Oil Reset, Oil Reset

20 MP OM EN USC

SGodley

owner's manual

2020 Jeep Compass Oil Reset | GetJerry.com Check out your

2020 COMPASS

File Info : application/pdf, 344 Pages, 28.38MB

P136184 20 MP OM EN USC DIGITAL

2020 COMPASS
OWNER'S MANUAL

This Owner's Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner's Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or offhighway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 7 1

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................9 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................ 61 3

4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 80 4

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 127 5

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................180 6

7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 216

8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 251

9 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 257
9

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 326
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 329
11

2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................................ 8 Essential Information.....................................................8 Symbols ..........................................................................8
ROLLOVER WARNING ......................................................... 8 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................... 8 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........................ 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE -- IF EQUIPPED ............................... 9 KEYS ....................................................................................10
Key Fobs ..................................................................... 10 IGNITION SWITCH ..............................................................13
Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition .................................... 13 Vehicle On Message .................................................. 13 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED .................14 How To Use Remote Start -- If Equipped................... 14 Remote Start Abort Message On The Instrument Cluster Display -- If Equipped..................................... 15 To Enter Remote Start Mode...................................... 15 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle ................................................................. 15 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle... 15 Remote Start Comfort Systems -- If Equipped ......... 15 Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation -- If Equipped ............................................. 15 General Information.................................................... 16 SENTRY KEY ........................................................................16 Replacement Keys ..................................................... 16 Key Programming ....................................................... 17 General Information.................................................... 17

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED .................. 17 To Arm The System .....................................................17 To Disarm The System ...............................................17 Rearming Of The System.............................................18 Security System Manual Override ..............................18
DOORS .................................................................................18 Manual Door Locks......................................................18 Power Door Locks........................................................19 Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry...........................19 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................................21 Child-Protection Door Lock System -- Rear Doors.....22
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS -- IF EQUIPPED ................22 Programming The Memory Feature............................22 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory ...........................................23 Memory Position Recall...............................................23
SEATS ..................................................................................23 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) -- If Equipped.......24 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................25 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) -- If Equipped .........26 Front Heated Seats -- If Equipped..............................27 Front Ventilated Seats -- If Equipped ........................28
HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................................28 Front Head Restraint Adjustment...............................29 Rear Head Restraints ..................................................29
STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 30 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............................30 Heated Steering Wheel -- If Equipped .......................30

MIRRORS ............................................................................ 31 Inside Day/Night Mirror -- If Equipped....................... 31 Electrochromic Mirror -- If Equipped ......................... 31 Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 31 Power Adjustment Mirrors .......................................... 32 Folding Mirrors ............................................................ 32 Heated Mirrors -- If Equipped .................................... 32 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................................... 33
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ............................................................ 33 Multifunction Lever .................................................... 33 Headlight Switch.......................................................... 33 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) -- If Equipped............ 34 High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 34 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control -- If Equipped................................................................... 34 Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 34 Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped ......................... 34 Headlight Time Delay .................................................. 34 Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 34 Fog Lights -- If Equipped............................................. 35 Turn Signals ................................................................ 35 Lane Change Assist .................................................... 35 Battery Saver Feature ................................................. 35
INTERIOR LIGHTS .............................................................. 35 Interior Courtesy Lights .............................................. 35
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .......................... 36 Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 36 Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped .......................... 37 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................................... 38 Windshield Wiper De-Icer -- If Equipped.................... 38

CLIMATE CONTROLS .........................................................38 Manual Climate Control Overview ............................. 38 Automatic Climate Control Overview ......................... 42 Climate Control Functions .......................................... 47 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 48 Operating Tips ............................................................ 48
WINDOWS ...........................................................................49 Power Window Controls.............................................. 49 Auto-Down Feature .................................................... 49 Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection.............. 49 Reset Auto-Up.............................................................. 50 Window Lockout Switch.............................................. 50 Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 50
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................50
Opening Sunroof ......................................................... 51 Opening Sunroof -- Vent............................................. 51 Closing Sunroof ........................................................... 51 Opening Power Shade ................................................ 52 Closing Power Shade .................................................. 52 Pinch Protect Feature ................................................. 52 Wind Buffeting ............................................................ 52 Sunroof Maintenance ................................................. 52 Ignition Off Operation.................................................. 52 HOOD ...................................................................................53 Opening The Hood ..................................................... 53 Closing The Hood ........................................................ 53 LIFTGATE ..............................................................................53 Opening........................................................................ 53 Closing ......................................................................... 54 Power Liftgate -- If Equipped...................................... 54 Cargo Area Features .................................................. 55

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................................................... 57 Storage .........................................................................57 Cupholders ..................................................................58 Power Outlets ..............................................................58 Power Inverter -- If Equipped......................................59
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED .......................... 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER...................................................... 61 Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................................63
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .....................................63 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ................................................................64 Oil Change Reset ........................................................65 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ....................65 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message -- Electrical Load Reduction Actions -- If Equipped ..................................................................69
TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................ 70 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 70
Red Warning Lights .....................................................70 Yellow Warning Lights .................................................73 Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................76 Green Indicator Lights.................................................76 White Indicator Lights..................................................77 Blue Indicator Lights....................................................78 Gray Indicator Lights ...................................................78 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II .................... 78 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity..................................................78 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 79

3
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................................. 80 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................... 80 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .................... 81
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ......................................... 86 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) -- If Equipped .............. 86 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation -- If Equipped ............................................. 90 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................. 92
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................................. 95 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..................... 95 Important Safety Precautions..................................... 95 Seat Belt Systems ...................................................... 96 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................102 Child Restraints ........................................................115 Transporting Pets .....................................................124
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................124 Transporting Passengers ..........................................124 Exhaust Gas ..............................................................124 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ...............................................................125 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ..................................................126
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................................127 Normal Starting ........................................................127 Cold Weather Operation (Below 22°F Or -30°C) ........................................128 Extended Park Starting .............................................128 After Starting -- Warming Up The Engine.................129 If Engine Fails To Start .............................................129 Stopping The Engine .................................................129

4 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED ..................... 129 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .................... 130 PARK BRAKE .................................................................... 130
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ........................................ 130 MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED ................... 133
Shifting....................................................................... 133 Downshifting.............................................................. 134 Parking....................................................................... 136 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 136 Ignition Park Interlock............................................... 137 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ........... 137 Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ............................................................ 137 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION -- IF EQUIPPED ..................................................................... 141 Jeep® Active Drive.................................................... 141 SELEC-TERRAIN -- IF EQUIPPED .................................... 142 Mode Selection Guide .............................................. 143 POWER STEERING ........................................................... 143 STOP/START SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED.......................... 144 Automatic Mode........................................................ 144 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop.............................................................. 144 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode.......... 145 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System .................................................... 145 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System .................................................... 145 System Malfunction .................................................. 145

SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED ................................. 146 To Activate................................................................. 146 To Set A Desired Speed............................................ 146 To Vary The Speed Setting ....................................... 146 To Accelerate For Passing........................................ 147 To Resume Speed ................................................... 147 To Deactivate ........................................................... 147
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 148
To Activate/Deactivate............................................. 149 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ................ 150 To Set A Desired ACC Speed.................................... 150 To Cancel................................................................... 150 To Turn Off................................................................. 150 To Resume ................................................................ 150 To Vary The Speed Setting ....................................... 151 Setting The Following Distance In ACC ........................................................................ 152 Overtake Aid.............................................................. 153 ACC Operation At Stop.............................................. 153 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ....................... 154 Display Warnings And Maintenance........................ 154 Precautions While Driving With ACC........................ 155 General Information ................................................. 157 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ........... 157 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 159 ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 159 ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 159 ParkSense Display.................................................... 159 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......................... 161 Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System... 161 Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 162 ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 162

LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED ..........................................163 LaneSense Operation ...............................................163 Turning LaneSense On Or Off...................................163 LaneSense Warning Message..................................163 Changing LaneSense Status ....................................166
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...........................167 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................................168 VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................169
Certification Label .....................................................169 TRAILER TOWING ............................................................170
Common Towing Definitions.....................................170 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................172 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................................172 Towing Requirements ..............................................173 Towing Tips ...............................................................175 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ........................................176 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........176 Recreational Towing -- Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ............................................................177 Recreational Towing -- 4X4 Models.........................177 DRIVING TIPS ....................................................................177 On-Road Driving Tips.................................................177 Off-Road Driving Tips.................................................178
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ......................................180 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR -- IF EQUIPPED ..................180
General Information..................................................183

BULB REPLACEMENT ..................................................... 184 Replacement Bulbs................................................... 184 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps -- If Equipped ................................................................ 185 Replacing Exterior Bulbs .......................................... 186 Replacing Interior Bulbs ........................................... 189
FUSES ................................................................................ 191 General Information.................................................. 192 Fuse Location ............................................................ 192 Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit ............................................ 192 Interior Fuses ............................................................ 195 Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit ................ 196
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..................................... 199 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .......................... 199 Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 200 Jacking Instructions ................................................. 200 Road Tire Installation................................................ 203
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED ................................. 203 JUMP STARTING............................................................... 208
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 208 Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 209 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED ............... 210 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 210 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ......................................... 211 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 212 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...................................... 213 Without The Key Fob................................................. 214 Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models -- With Key Fob ............................................................. 214 4x4 Models................................................................ 214 Emergency Tow Hooks -- If Equipped ..................... 214 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) .. 215 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 215

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 216 Maintenance Plan..................................................... 216
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................................... 219 2.4L Engine ............................................................... 219 Checking Oil Level .................................................... 220 Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 220 Maintenance-Free Battery ...................................... 220 Pressure Washing..................................................... 221
DEALER SERVICE ............................................................ 221 Engine Oil ................................................................. 221 Engine Oil Filter ........................................................ 222 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 222 Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 222 Body Lubrication ...................................................... 223 Wiper Blades ............................................................ 223 Exhaust System ....................................................... 226 Cooling System ......................................................... 227 Brake System ........................................................... 230 Manual Transmission -- If Equipped ....................... 230 Automatic Transmission -- If Equipped................... 231
RAISING THE VEHICLE ................................................... 232 TIRES ................................................................................ 232
Tire Safety Information ............................................ 232 Tires -- General Information .................................... 239 Tire Types .................................................................. 242 Spare Tires -- If Equipped ....................................... 243 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ................................ 244 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 244 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................................ 245 Treadwear ................................................................. 245 Traction Grades ........................................................ 246 Temperature Grades ................................................ 246

5
STORING THE VEHICLE ....................................................246 BODYWORK ......................................................................247
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....................247 Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................247 Preserving The Bodywork .........................................248 INTERIORS ........................................................................249 Seats And Fabric Parts..............................................249 Plastic And Coated Parts ..........................................250 Leather Parts .............................................................250 Glass Surfaces ..........................................................250
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA .....................................................251 Vehicle Identification Number..................................251
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ..............251 Torque Specifications ...............................................251
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .....................................................252 2.4L Engine................................................................252 Reformulated Gasoline ............................................252 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................................252 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....................253 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..................253 MMT In Gasoline .......................................................253 Materials Added To Fuel ..........................................253 Fuel System Cautions ...............................................254 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................................254
FLUID CAPACITIES ...........................................................255 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...............................................256
Engine .......................................................................256 Chassis ......................................................................256

6
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................................................... 257 CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 257 UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................................... 258
Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect 4 Settings .............................. 258 Customer Programmable Features -- Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings................................. 268 SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION......................... 280 Safety Guidelines ...................................................... 280 UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ............................ 280 Introduction ............................................................... 280 Radio Mode ............................................................... 281 Media Mode .............................................................. 288 Phone Mode .............................................................. 294 CONNECTED SERVICES-- IF EQUIPPED ....................... 302 Introduction To SiriusXM GuardianTM ...................... 302 Getting Started With SiriusXM GuardianTM ............. 304 Using SiriusXM GuardianTM....................................... 305 Manage My SiriusXM GuardianTM Account.............. 315 CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ........................................ 315 SiriusXM GuardianTM Business Hours:..................... 315 Connected Services SOS FAQs ............................... 315 Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs .... 316 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs ..................... 316 Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ............... 316 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock FAQs .......................................................................... 316

Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs........................................................................... 316 Connected Services Account FAQs.......................... 317 Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs .......................................................................... 318 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 319 Radio Operation........................................................ 319 Media Mode .............................................................. 319 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ............................................. 320 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ................. 320 Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 320 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ............ 321 Introducing Uconnect ............................................... 321 Get Started................................................................ 322 Basic Voice Commands............................................ 322 Radio ......................................................................... 322 Media......................................................................... 322 Phone ........................................................................ 323 Voice Text Reply -- If Equipped ................................ 323 Climate ...................................................................... 323 Navigation (4C NAV) -- If Equipped ......................... 324 Siri® Eyes Free -- If Equipped ................................ 324 Using Do Not Disturb ............................................... 324 Android AutoTM -- If Equipped .................................. 324 Apple CarPlay® -- If Equipped ................................ 325 General Information ................................................. 325 Additional Information.............................................. 325

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................326
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................326 Prepare A List ............................................................326 Be Reasonable With Requests.................................326 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................326 FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................326 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................326 In Mexico Contact......................................................326 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................327 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................................327 Service Contract .......................................................327 WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................327 MOPAR PARTS .................................................................327 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................327 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........327 In Canada...................................................................328 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................328

7
INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. When it comes to service, remember that an authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

8
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment. The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
SYMBOLS
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to "Warning Lights and Messages" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not. Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE -- IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner's Information right through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped). To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon

NOTE: Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion. Pre-Installed Features Your User Guide -- Updated in real-time Touchscreen convenience Maintenance schedules and information Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary Available when and where you need it Customizable interface Multilingual Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There's no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device needed for playback. Plus, it's updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.

Features/Benefits

Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio Enhanced search and browsing capability

Robust NAV application (if equipped)

Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category

Icon and symbol glossary

Crucial driver information and assistance:

Operating Instructions

Warranty Information

Fluid Level Standards

Maintenance Schedules

Emergency Procedures

911 Contact and More

TIP: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.

10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system that consists of a key fob and a Keyless Enter-N-Go button. NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

1 -- Unlock Button 2 -- Lock Button 3 -- Remote Start Button 4 -- PANIC Button 5 -- Emergency Key 6 -- Liftgate Button (If Equipped)
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow. The keyless ignition key fob also includes an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob.

Key Fob

Emergency Key Removal The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become depleted. The emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key from the keyless ignition key fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated. 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the unlock button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" located in "Multimedia" for further programmable information.

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE: Perchlorate Material -- special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information. Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. Key Fob: 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal 1 -- Emergency Key Release Button 2 -- Emergency Key

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11 2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the
emergency key, a flat-head screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
2
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob Battery Replacement 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar object and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together.

Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer. NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING! Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go --
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO -- IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment. The START/STOP push button ignition has three operating modes. The three modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START. NOTE: If the ignition state/mode does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition.
START/STOP Ignition Button

The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes: OFF The engine is stopped. Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available. ON/RUN Driving mode. All the electrical devices are available. START Start the engine.
WARNING! When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING! Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.
Never remove the mechanical key while the vehicle 2
is moving, as the steering wheel will automatically lock as soon as the key is turned. This also applies to vehicles that are being towed.
CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating."
VEHICLE ON MESSAGE
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in ON/RUN (engine not running) mode, a chime will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message will display in the cluster. NOTE: The power window switches and power sunroof (if equipped) will remain active for three minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The timing for this feature is programmable.

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make sure the keyless ignition is in OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 328 ft (100m). NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START -- IF EQUIPPED
Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off. NOTE: With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The vehicle must be started manually with the key fob after two consecutive timeouts.

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: Gear selector in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) Battery at an acceptable charge level Check engine light shall not be present PANIC button not pushed System not disabled from previous Remote Start event Vehicle Security Alarm indicator flashing Ignition in OFF position Fuel level meets minimum requirement Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY -- IF EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely: Remote Start Aborted -- Door Open Remote Start Aborted -- Hood Open Remote Start Aborted -- Fuel Low Remote Start Aborted -- Liftgate Open Remote Start Disabled -- Start Vehicle To Reset Remote Start Aborted -- Too Cold Remote Start Aborted -- Time Expired The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode. For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. The engine can be started two consecutive times with the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP ignition button twice (or the ignition switch must be placed in the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE WITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND DRIVE THE VEHICLE
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go -- 2
Passive Entry feature, the message "Remote Start Active -- Push Start Button" will show in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS -- IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER ACTIVATION -- IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will resume previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle. After placing the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION! The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
REPLACEMENT KEYS
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION! Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go --
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at your authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to your authorized dealer.

KEY PROGRAMMING
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: The horn will pulse The turn signals will flash The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: 1. Make sure the vehicle's ignition is placed in the
OFF position. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle's keyless ignition system is OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in the

same exterior zone. Refer to "Doors" in this

chapter.

Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the vehicle security light (located in the lower left portion of the instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every three seconds until it is disarmed.

NOTE: If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is closed, then slow down to every three seconds.

TO DISARM THE SYSTEM

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods: Push the unlock button on the key fob. Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the
door. Refer to "Doors" in this chapter for further information. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF mode to disarm the system.

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after approximately 90 seconds, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible) when you shut the door, the door will remain locked. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate.

WARNING! For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and exit the vehicle. When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

POWER DOOR LOCKS
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel door.
Power Door Lock Switch If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO -- PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go -- Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) and fuel door without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. NOTE: Passive Entry may be programmed on/off. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. The key fob may not be able to be detected by the Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Unlock From The Driver's Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically.
2
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press," refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press"). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry. There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle: A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the car and it does not find any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are true: The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs. There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then close the doors. To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the liftgate handle release. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion. To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the liftgate handle release.

NOTE: The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry Location To Lock The Vehicle's Doors And Liftgate With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the Passive Entry lock button located on the outside door handle, to lock the vehicle doors and liftgate. NOTE: DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE: After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.

If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect System, the key fob protection described in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier

interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if: 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled. 2. All doors are closed. 3. For vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions,
the transmission gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in PARK. For vehicles equipped with manual transmissions, the vehicle must not be moving and the clutch is released. 4. For vehicles equipped with automatic transmissions, any door is opened. For vehicles equipped with manual transmissions, either of the front doors are opened.

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM -- REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock system. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-head screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile saves desired position settings for the following features: Driver seat position Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if equipped) A set of desired radio station presets NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.

The memory setting switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function. The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switches
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following: NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory. 1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the ON position. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station presets).

3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch, and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will display which memory position is being set.
NOTE: Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile. To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory" in this section.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to recall one of two saved memory profiles with a push of the unlock button on the key fob. NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select the "Memory Linked To FOB" feature through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. To program your key fob, perform the following: 1. Place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position. 2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile. 3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch, then within five seconds push and release the button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display. 4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. NOTE: Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster display. To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired memory position.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

WARNING! It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) -- IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.

WARNING! Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment -- If Equipped
The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Front Seat Adjustment While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Recline Lever
WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Seat Height Adjustment

Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat -- If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seatback has a softback surface that you cannot use as a work surface when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is not in motion. Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat. NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING! Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
WARNING! Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room. NOTE: Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING! It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

WARNING!

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either side of the upper outer edge of the seat.

Rear Seat Release Lever
1 -- Seat Belt Guide 2 -- Seatback Release Lever

2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely forward.

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position. Raise the seatback and lock it into place. The release lever will show a red indicator while in the unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red indicator will no longer be visible.
WARNING! Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) -- IF EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position. Use the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of the seatback.

Power Seat Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Height Adjustment The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Tilt Adjustment The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch.

Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Power Lumbar -- If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat -- If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position.

When you place the vehicle's ignition in the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the vehicle's ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile. Refer to "Driver Memory Settings -- If Equipped" in this chapter for further information. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Multimedia" for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

FRONT HEATED SEATS -- IF EQUIPPED

The front heated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.

Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on.

Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic temperature controls with an integrated center stack, or manual temperature controls, you'll find the heated seat switches on the switch bank below the radio screen. If the HI level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles With Remote Start -- If Equipped On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
WARNING! Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

FRONT VENTILATED SEATS -- IF EQUIPPED

Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO. The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.

Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.

Press the ventilated seat button choose LO.

a second time to

Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Vehicles With Remote Start -- If Equipped On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start. This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING! All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.

FRONT HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way driver and passenger head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING! All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Head Restraint Adjustment Button To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head restraint to the forward most position and release. The head restraint will return to the rear most position.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
The rear head restraints have two positions: up or down. When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING! ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

To unlock the steering column, push the control handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL -- IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element on.

once to

Press the heated steering wheel button time to turn the heating element off.

a second

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

WARNING! Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

Tilt/Telescoping Lever

MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR -- IF EQUIPPED
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

ELECTROCHROMIC MIRROR -- IF EQUIPPED
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield button with a counter clockwise rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up and down for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE: The Electrochromic Mirror feature is disabled when the
vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing. The Electrochromic Mirror feature can be turned on or
off using the button located on the mirror.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Button

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's door panel. To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the right or left side using the mirror selector switch, then push the mirror adjustment switch in the desired direction indicated by the direction arrows. NOTE: To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN position. Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Power Mirror Switch 1 -- Mirror Selector Switch 2 -- Mirror Adjustment Switch 3 -- Power Folding Mirror Switch (If Equipped)

FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror Power Folding Mirror -- If Equipped The switch for the power folding mirrors is located in the power mirror switch. Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.

Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs: The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding. The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds. To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position. Puddle Lamps -- If Equipped Located under the exterior mirrors is a small lamp that illuminates the ground when the doors are unlocked with the key fob or when the doors to the vehicle are open.
HEATED MIRRORS -- IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Climate Controls" in this chapter for further information.

ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.

NOTE: The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is against the windshield for additional sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the

headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if

equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights, and fog

lights (if equipped).

Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature -- If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun. 1. Fold down the sun visor. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. 4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun blockage.

Multifunction Lever

Headlight Switch
1 -- Rotate Headlight Control 2 -- Ambient Lighting Control 3 -- Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 4 -- Front Fog Light Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned on or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will return the lights to low beams.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE: The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS -- IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off. If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the delay. If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position prior to turning the ignition OFF, there is no need to turn the headlight switch to off to activate Headlight Delay. The headlight delay time is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.

FOG LIGHTS -- IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog light button. To turn off the front fog lights, either push the fog lights button a second time or turn off the headlight switch. An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the instrument cluster display and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

INTERIOR LIGHTS

INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS

The interior lights come on when a door is opened. The

light switches in the overhead console are for reading lamps.

Overhead Light Switches To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove compartment light and the cargo area light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel. Rotating the instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights, ONLY when the parking lights or headlights are turned on. Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or down will adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights ONLY when the parking lights or headlights are turned on, AND ONLY if the built in cluster light sensor determines that the ambient light levels are low enough that the backlighting should be enabled.
Instrument Panel Dimmer

Ambient Light Control -- If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lights under the instrument panel, door map pocket lights, and cubby bin lights. Ambient lights are only enabled when the headlights are active.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Wiper/Washer" in this section.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent wipe interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third detent for low wiper operation and the fourth detent for high wiper operation.

Windshield Wiper Operation

CAUTION! Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the parked position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Washer Operation To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off. NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Mist Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The washer function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS -- IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of two settings to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not using the system. NOTE: The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield. Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the

wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the

following conditions: Change In Ignition Position -- If the vehicle is in Rain

Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to

ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle

speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper

switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent

wipe position.

Transmission In NEUTRAL Position -- The Rain Sensing system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear is selected at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper switch is moved or the gear selector is moved out of NEUTRAL.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit -- On vehicles equipped with Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper has different operation modes: Intermittent mode In Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front
window wiper) when the front window wiper is operating. Continuous mode Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wipers are active and the REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will turn on for one wipe.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. To use the washer, push the lever forward and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position, the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.

If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the lever is released the pump will resume normal operation.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following conditions: Activation By Front Defrost-- The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of a cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and when the ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Activation By Rear Defrost -- The Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear defrost is turned on and when the ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C). Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped) -- When remote start is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 41°F (5°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer shall be enabled. On exiting remote start resume previous operation except, if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation shall continue.

CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Manual Climate Controls

Climate Controls Description

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39

Icon

Description

MAX A/C Setting

Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C Setting, to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving the Temperature Control 2
Knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.

A/C Button

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. Front Defrost Setting Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon

Description

Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.

Temperature Control Knob Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.

Blower Control Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

Mode Control Turn the Mode Control knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Icon Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41

Description

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the

center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below

the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the off (O) position.

42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Climate Controls Description

Icon

Description

MAX A/C Button

Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.

NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

A/C Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

AUTO Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. This feature automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to "Automatic Operation" within this section for further information.

Front Defrost Button

Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45

Icon

Description

Rear Defrost Button

Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the

heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the read window defroster is on. The rear window defroster

automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons

Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE: The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen. Faceplate Blower Knob Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases Touchscreen Blower Buttons as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be
selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Faceplate Mode Button
Touchscreen Mode Buttons

Description Mode Control Mode Control regulates the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution outlets are: instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode. Touchscreen: Press one of the "MODE" buttons to change the airflow distribution mode. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode

Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Icon Mix Mode

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Description Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
2
Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes. NOTE: For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the control button to blink and then turns off.

48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system achieves and automatically maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-programmable feature. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low until the engine warms up. The blower increases in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart

WEATHER Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot

CONTROL SETTINGS Set the mode control to
, on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort.

Warm Weather Cool Sunny
Cool & Humid Conditions
Cold Weather

Turn on and set the mode control to the
position.
Operate in position. Set the mode control to
position and turn on to keep windows clear. Set the mode control to the position. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to the position.

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.
Power Window Controls There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not

leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location

accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a

vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended

children, can become entrapped by the windows while

operating the power window switches. Such

entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the passenger door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down, for a short period of time, and release and the window will go down automatically. To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-UP FEATURE WITH ANTI-PINCH PROTECTION
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and release and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the button with turn on). To enable the window controls, push and release the window lockout button again (the indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE -- IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches 1 -- Power Shade Switch 2 -- Front Panel Open/Close Switch 3 -- Front Panel Vent Switch

WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured. Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. Do not use the sunroof and its related parts for supporting and/or grabbing purposes. Serious personal injury may result to fingers and other body parts as well as damage to the sunroof.

OPENING SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions, comfort stop position and full open position. The comfort stop position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting when driving with side windows closed and sunroof open. If the sunshade is in the closed position when initiating a sunroof open or vent command the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the sunroof opening. Express Push the switch and release it within one-half second, the sunroof will open to the comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the switch and release it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Manual Mode Push and hold the switch, the sunroof will open to the comfort stop position and automatically stop. Push the switch and hold it again, the sunroof will open to the full open position and automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51

OPENING SUNROOF -- VENT

Push and release the Vent button within one-half second

and the sunroof will move from the closed position to the

vent position. This is called "Express Vent." During Express

Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the

sunroof.

NOTE: When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open position, Express Vent operation is not available. You must push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof from a slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof movement will stop if the switch is released prior to the sunroof reaching the vent position.

CLOSING SUNROOF

Express Pull the switch down and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof. Manual Mode Pull and hold the switch down and the sunroof will close from any position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is pulled again.

52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING POWER SHADE
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half open and full open positions. When opening the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half open position regardless of express or manual open operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue on to full open position. Express Push the sunshade switch and release it within one-half second, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and release the switch again from the half open position and the sunshade will open to the full open position and stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade. Manual Mode Push and hold the sunshade switch, the sunshade will open to the half open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch again and the sunshade will open to the full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
CLOSING POWER SHADE
If the sunroof is open/vented, the sunshade cannot be closed beyond the half open position. Pulling the sunshade close switch when sunshade is at half open position with sunroof open/vented will automatically close sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.

Express Pull the sunshade switch down and release it within one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade will full close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade will close to the half open position and stop; pull and release the sunshade switch again to automatically close both the sunroof and sunshade completely. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunshade. Manual Mode Pull and hold the sunshade switch down. If the sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade will fully close from any position. If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade will close to the half open position and stop; pulling and holding the sunshade switch again will close both the sunroof and sunshade completely. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pulled again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch and release to Express Close.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. 1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver's side of the instrument panel.

Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
CLOSING THE HOOD

Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel) 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the hood at the center. Reach in at the center of the hood with a palm facing the ground. Once contact is made with the safety latch release lever, push it toward the passenger side of the vehicle to fully release the hood.

WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53

LIFTGATE

OPENING

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate may be released by the overhead console switch, the outside handle, or the key fob (if equipped).

The overhead console switch and key fob (if equipped) will release the liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.

Liftgate Entry NOTE: Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.

54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
CLOSING
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches the self-closing position.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.

POWER LIFTGATE -- IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed by the key fob, outside handle, overhead console switch, and the liftgate switch on the upper left trim. Using any of the following ways: When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open. When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close. When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse. The key fob and the overhead console switch will open the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the liftgate. When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked. Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.

Lock The Vehicle
WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
NOTE: The liftgate will not power open or close if the gear
selector is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance. There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position. If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or closed manually. The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -22°F (-30°C) or temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate switches.

If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving.
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. However, vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed while the power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
WARNING! Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING! Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of 400 lb (181 kg). Cargo Load Floor Positions The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different levels to create more space in the cargo area. These positions are: upper, center, and lower.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55

NOTE: The lower position is not available in vehicles equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a full size spare tire. The center position is not available in vehicles equipped with a full size spare tire.

To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the

back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the front

of the floor into place.

Cargo Load Floor Positions
1 -- Upper Position 2 -- Center Position 3 -- Lower Position

56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Raising The Load Floor To raise the load floor for access of the Tire Service Kit, or spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor handle. Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor upward can damage the floor and vehicle's trim panel.

To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor positioning brackets. Push the top of the floor down firmly to secure it in this position.

Raised Load Floor -- (Power Liftgate)
1 -- Raised Floor Maximum Height 2 -- Raised Load Floor

Fully Raised Load Floor Position
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room. Refer to "Seats" in this chapter for further information.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving. Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.

WARNING! Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers. To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle: Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar. Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.

Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2

Rear Storage Bin
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Glove Compartment To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in the open position. Driving with the glove compartment open may result in injury in a collision.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover. The center console armrest can also be adjusted forward and rearward by pushing in the desired direction until it locks into place.

Center Console The center console has a storage area which can hold cell phones, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and other small items.
WARNING! Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers, located in the center console.

NOTE: All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

In addition to the front power outlet, there may also be a power outlet located in the rear cargo area, if equipped.

CAUTION! Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Front Cupholders There are two cupholders (if equipped) for the rear seat passengers, located in the center armrest.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a "key" symbol or a "battery" symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.

The front power outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet

Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet -- If Equipped NOTE: If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet can be switched from ignition only to constant battery powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details.
WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

CAUTION! Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

POWER INVERTER -- IF EQUIPPED
Power Inverter Location There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59

To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug in a device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading

the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices

prior to using the inverter.

WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. Do not touch with wet hands. Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.

60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK -- IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area. Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

WARNING! Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION! To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately. Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle. Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)

CAUTION! Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recommended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.

61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
Base Instrument Cluster

62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Premium Instrument Cluster

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in this chapter for further information.
3. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 63

5. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H" pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster

display, which offers useful information to the driver. With

the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,

or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster

display is designed to display important information about

your vehicle's systems and features. Using a driver

interactive display located on the instrument panel, your

instrument cluster display can show you how systems are

working and give you warnings when they aren't. The

steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll

through and enter the main menus and submenus. You

can access the specific information you want and make

selections and adjustments.

64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the following as equipped: Speedometer Vehicle Info Driver Assist Fuel Economy Trip Stop/Start (If Equipped) Audio Messages Screen Setup Vehicle Settings The systems allow the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.
Down Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.
Right Arrow Button Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Left Arrow Button Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the OK button for one second to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Premium Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls

Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

OIL CHANGE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Due" message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure: 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds. 3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 65

Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to change the speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left or right arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info submenus and follow the prompts on each screen as needed. 1. Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, "Inflate Tire To XX" is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire Pressure System" is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset.
Refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" under "Safety" for further information.
2. Coolant Temperature Displays the actual coolant temperature.

3. Transmission Temperature -- Automatic Transmission Only

Displays the actual transmission temperature.

4. Oil Temperature

Displays the level of oil temperature.

5. Battery Voltage

Displays the actual battery voltage

Fuel Economy

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy feature.

Range The display shows the estimated distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display will change to a "LOW FUEL" message. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" message and a new Range value will display. Range cannot be reset through the OK button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range displayed value.

Average This display shows the average fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.

Current This display shows the current fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving.

66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed and highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu -- If Equipped The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display: Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off." Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready." Push and release the SET + or the SETbutton (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display: ACC SET When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: Distance Setting Change System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning

ACC Unavailable Warning The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. LaneSense -- If Equipped The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. Refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following: Distance Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items Upper Left None Compass (default setting) Outside Temp Date Time Ignition State Range

Fuel Economy Average -- Premium Cluster Fuel Economy Current -- Premium Cluster Upper Right None Compass Outside Temp Date Time Ignition State (default setting) Range Fuel Economy Average -- Premium Cluster Fuel Economy Current -- Premium Cluster Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) Yes No Current Gear -- If Equipped On Off (default setting) Center None Compass Menu Title (default setting) Date

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67

Outside Temp Time Range Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy Current Audio Info Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Speedometer
Vehicle Settings -- If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster display. This menu item allows you to change the settings for the following: Display Units Clock and Date Security Safety and Assistance Lights Doors and Locks Compass -- If Equipped NOTE: Most vehicle settings will be moved into the radio if a touchscreen radio is present, please refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

Display

By selecting Display, the following settings can be selected:

Language: select the language in which to display the information/warnings.

Nav. Repetition: displays information relating to the navigation mode.

Units

By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to use for

displaying various values can be set. Possible options are:

Metric

Custom: allows individual changes of units for temperature, distance, consumption, and tire pressure.

Clock And Date

By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date can be set. Possible options are:

Set Time: adjust hours/minutes

Set Format: adjust the time format "12h" (12 hours) or "24h" (24 hours)

Set Date: adjust day/month/year

Security

Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of Passenger Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child restraint must be installed in the front seat.

68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Safety And Assistance By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the following adjustments can be made: ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the type of
information provided by ParkSense Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the front ParkSense Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the rear ParkSense FCW Warning (If Equipped): a selection of operating
modes of the system Forward Collision Warning Plus FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of the
"readiness" of intervention of the Forward Collision Warning Plus system, based on the distance to the obstacle Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/disabling the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain LaneSense Force (If Equipped): selection of the force to be applied to the steering wheel to put the car in the roadway through the system of electrical drive, in case of operation of the system LaneSense LaneSense Warning (If Equipped): a selection of the "readiness" of intervention of LaneSense Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low, Medium, Loud Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the procedure to carry out braking system maintenance Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto insertion of the Electric Parking Brake

Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system
Lights By selecting Lights, the following adjustments can be made: Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the sensitivity of
lighting in the doors and overhead console Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness Greeting Lights: activate the direction indicators when
unlocking the doors Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
daytime running lights Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
cornering lights Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
automatic high beam headlights Doors And Locks By selecting Doors and Locks, the following adjustments can be made: Auto Lock Doors: activate/deactivate the automatic
locking of the doors with the vehicle moving Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle

Lights with Lock: activate the direction indicators when locking the doors
Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate the horn when pressing the lock button on the key. The options are "Off", "First Press", and "Second Press"
Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine with the key
Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to unlock all the doors or only the driver's side door on the first push of the unlock button on the key
Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/deactivate automatic climate control during vehicle starts
Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deactivate memory linked to a key
Compass By selecting Compass, the following settings can be changed: Calibration (If Equipped) This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will display dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now function normally.

Variance (If Equipped) Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
Compass Variance Map
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE MESSAGE -- ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION ACTIONS -- IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When load reduction is activated, the message "Battery Saver On" or "Battery Saver Mode" will appear in the instrument cluster display. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. NOTE: The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously. If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to "Battery Charge Warning Light" in this chapter for further information. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction: Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel Heated/Cooled Cup Holders -- If Equipped Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors

HVAC System

150W Power Inverter System

Audio and Telematics System

Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:

The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical

power to the vehicle system because the electrical

loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.

Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).

Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.

Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).

The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).

The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.

The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.

The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.

70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present ("Battery Saver On" or "Battery Saver Mode") During a trip: Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) Check the audio settings (volume) After a trip: Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time). The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and release the OK button to display the Trip information.

Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the
last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset. Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
last reset. Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
last reset. Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/ START position. To Reset A Trip Function Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK button to clear the resettable function being displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/ or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner's Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected.

If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS) system. Refer to "Power Steering" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this light will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ ON/RUN position and if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

Refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the message remains after restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING! If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION! Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

Vehicle Security Warning Light -- If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73

Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is Active. The "ESC Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" and the "ESC Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

Fuel Cutoff Warning Light -- If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.

LaneSense Warning Light -- If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker. Refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Service LaneSense Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.

74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
For further information, refer to "Cooling System" in "Servicing And Maintenance".
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is 13.5 gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal (5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Service 4WD Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in "Safety" for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light -- If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION! Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system

operation or sensor damage may result when using

replacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an

aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you

take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your

sensor function checked.

Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light -- If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow hook. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels. Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

Forward Collision Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE: After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a problem with the system is detected. This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is set and there is no target vehicle detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Detected Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and the target vehicle is detected. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light -- If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
For further information, refer to "Exterior Lights" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle".
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77

Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control is set to the desired speed. Refer to "Speed Control -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Stop / Start Active Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in "Autostop" mode.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high beam headlights are on.
For further information, refer to "Exterior Lights" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle".

WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS

LaneSense Indicator Light -- If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is ON, but not

armed, the LaneSense indicator light

illuminates solid white. This occurs when only

left, right, or neither lane line has been

detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is

ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.

Refer to "LaneSense -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped

This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the "4WD LOW" position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.

78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to "Speed Control -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light -- If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control is set.
Refer to "Speed Control -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light -- If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control has been turned on, but not set. Refer to "Speed Control -- If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING! ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle. If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.
For further information, refer to "Cybersecurity" in "Multimedia".

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illumi-
nated until you place the ignition in the off position or 3
start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

80
SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). You also may experience the following when ABS activates: The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop) The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING! The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)

WARNING! The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" is on. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-lock Brakes. If the "Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING! The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

SAFETY 81

Brake System Warning Light

The red "Brake System Warning Light" will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the "Brake System Warning Light" remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the "Brake System Warning Light" does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Electric Power

Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the

ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque

that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/ maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver

receives that the feature is active is the torque applied to

the steering wheel.

NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver's sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.

82 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Oversteer -- when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position. Understeer -- when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when the TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING! Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC OFF Button ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The "Partial Off" mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily push the "ESC OFF" switch and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC OFF" switch and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" will turn off. NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momentarily pushing the "ESC OFF" button to enter "Partial Off" mode. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the "ESC OFF" button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING! When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in "Partial Off" mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" mode.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by pushing and holding the "ESC OFF" switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running.

SAFETY 83

After five seconds, the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate and the "ESC OFF" message will appear in the instrument cluster display.

In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the "limited slip"

feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At

40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to "Partial Off"

mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the

vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC

system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds

so that it will not interfere with off-road driving. However,

ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The "ESC OFF Indicator

Light" will always be illuminated when ESC is off.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC OFF" switch. This will restore the "ESC On" mode of operation.

NOTE: The "ESC OFF" message will display and an audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the PARK (P) position from any other position, and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

WARNING! In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. "ESC Off" mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

84 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is turned to the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when Traction Control System (TCS) is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. NOTE: The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON. Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously. The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) -- If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk) Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. HDC has three states: 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate). 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application). 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC: The driveline is in 4L Range. The vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h). The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released. The driver's door is closed. Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver and can be adjusted within the thresholds by using throttle or brake application. Driver Override: The driver may override HDC activation speed with throttle or brake application at any time. Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur: Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed exceeding
7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h). Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade. Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).

Disabling HDC HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur: The driver pushes the HDC switch. The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range. The driver's door opens. The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.) Feedback To The Driver: The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED, which offer feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in. The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC. The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch when enable conditions have not been met. The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate: The feature must be enabled. The vehicle must be stopped. The park brake must be off. The driver door must be closed. The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear). HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.

SAFETY 85

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such

as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while

pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driver

involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be

attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and

objects, and most importantly brake operation to

ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road

conditions. Your complete attention is always required

while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision

or serious personal injury.

Towing With HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING! If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
(Continued)

86 SAFETY
WARNING! HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia".
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may

occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to "Trailer Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. When TSC is functioning, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes.
WARNING! If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of the vehicle. The zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. NOTE: The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. The BSM system detection zone does NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be necessary to deactivate the BSM system manually to avoid misdetection. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds).

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown) The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

SAFETY 87

Warning Light Location

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.

Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Side Monitoring

88 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Overtaking/Approaching

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes. NOTE: The BSM system may experience drop outs (blinking on and off) in the side mirror LED icons while a motorcycle, or any small target, remains at the vehicle's B-pillar for an extended period of time (longer than a couple of seconds).

Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Overtaking/Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.

Opposing Traffic
WARNING! The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING! Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting) When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to

SAFETY 89
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio 4
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. Blocked Sensor If the system detects degraded performance due to contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indicators will remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear the fascia area around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage, reset the system by cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.

90 SAFETY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION -- IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the

potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h). The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.

The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
WARNING! Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the Uconnect settings. NOTE: The default status of FCW is "Full On," this allows the system to provide warning and autonomous braking in the event of a potential frontal collision. Changing the FCW status to "Warning Only" prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision. Changing the FCW status to off deactivates the system, so no warning or autonomous braking will be available in case of a possible collision. NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.

Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Operation Settings are programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. The default status of FCW is the "Medium" setting and the FCW is in the "Full On" setting. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. Changing the FCW status to the "Far" setting allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the latter is at a farther distance than in the "Medium" setting. This provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision. Changing the FCW status to the "Near" setting, allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when the vehicle in the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. NOTE: The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down. FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.

SAFETY 91

If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will be displayed.

FCW Limited Warning

If the instrument cluster display reads "FCW Limited

Functionality" or "FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front

Windshield" momentarily, there may be a condition that

limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still

driveable under normal conditions, the active braking may

not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the

system performance is no longer present, the system will

return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display reads "FCW Unavailable Service Required", there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

92 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. NOTE: Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).

This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure proper TPMS feature operation. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
(Continued)

CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE: The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light. Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components: Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low" message, an "Inflate to XX" message, and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted or in a different color.

SAFETY 93

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those highlighted or in a different color in the instrument cluster display graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value, as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will stop being highlighted or return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off.

NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.

The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

94 SAFETY
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors

Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size Spare 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact or non-matching full size spare tire. 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color or highlighted pressure value and the "Inflate to XX" message. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation -- If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values.

To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
Seat Belt Systems Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags Child Restraints Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

SAFETY 95
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 4
belt properly (Refer to "Child Restraints" in this section for further information) must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position. 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (Refer to "Child Restraints" in this section for further information). 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

96 SAFETY
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the "Customer Assistance" section for customer service contact information.
WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection

and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and

sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/ shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)

WARNING! Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can't straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
(Continued)

SAFETY 97
WARNING! A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. 4
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

98 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Positioning The Lap Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button.

To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING! Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate and buckle, if equipped, should remain connected at all times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become disconnected, they must be properly reconnected prior to the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant. 1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.

SAFETY 99

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."

Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle 3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

100 SAFETY 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt.

To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. 7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. 8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision. (Continued)

WARNING! When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING! ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant's body is LESS than 6 inches. Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraints" section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

SAFETY 101
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations 4
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

102 SAFETY
WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING! The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/ RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" section of this manual.

SAFETY 103
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.
4
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations 1 -- Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 -- Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 -- Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

104 SAFETY
WARNING! Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System ("OCS") that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant's seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING! No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage -- for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Occupant Classification System (OCS) -- Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant's seated weight, as determined by the OCS. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the following: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.

The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that: The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat*
Properly seated adult

Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment

SAFETY 105

Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status
Unoccupied seat

Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment

* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,

allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front

passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,

including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front

passenger seat.

WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

106 SAFETY The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are: Sitting upright Facing forward Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly

Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat The front passenger's seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger's decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger's seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include: The front passenger's weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel). The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle. The front passenger's seatback is not in the full upright position.

The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat. Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console. Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat. Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger's seated weight. The OCS determines the front passenger's most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

SAFETY 107

WARNING! Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat.

Not Seated Properly
WARNING! If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant's properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant's properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)

The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will

turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front

passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system.

If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used.

108 SAFETY
The following requirements must be strictly followed: Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way. Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle. Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion. Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING! Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING! Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way. Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING! Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

SAFETY 109

Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

110 SAFETY
WARNING! Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Rollover Events Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the

vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Seat Belt Buckle Switch Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Knee Air Bags Front and Side Impact Sensors Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Track Position Sensors Occupant Classification System

If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment. After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped) Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped) Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power

Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System: Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door Cut off battery power to the:
Engine Electric Motor (if equipped) Electric power steering Brake booster Electric park brake Automatic transmission gear selector Horn Front wiper Headlamp washer pump

SAFETY 111

NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

Enhanced Accident Response System

Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

112 SAFETY

Customer Action 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Customer Will See NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS.

SAFETY 113

Customer Action

Customer Will See NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light is ON SOLID.

10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).

Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.

12. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).

System is now reset and the engine may be started.

Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

114 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

SAFETY 115

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

For additional information, refer to http:// www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 18883274236

Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's

website for additional information: https://

www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/ child-car-seat-safety.html

116 SAFETY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING! Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)

WARNING! After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back?

SAFETY 117

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.

A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a

booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

118 SAFETY

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint

Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An "X" Below

LATCH Lower Anchors Only X

Seat Belt Only
X X

LATCH Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY 119

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH

anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if

allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your

booster seat owner's manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?

You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors

Yes

in the center position. The inner anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid

lower anchors in the center position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Never "share" a LATCH anchorage with two or more child

restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated

LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child

seat in the center position next to a child seat using the

LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger

Yes

seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner's manual for more

information.

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

120 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other, you must use the seat belt for the center position. You can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions. Please refer to "Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System" for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

SAFETY 121

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child

restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used

by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle

the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the

child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the

child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child

restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat

belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts

are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING! Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

122 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/ shoulder belt.
WARNING! Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be "switched" into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description in "Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)" under "Occupant Restraint Systems" for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR -- Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child

Yes

restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer

also allows contact.

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/ shoulder belt.
WARNING! Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

SAFETY 123

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to

any location in front of the car seat, including the seat

frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether

strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage

that is approved for that seating position, located

behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section

"Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)

Restraint System" for the location of approved tether

anchorages in your vehicle.

124 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING! An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING! Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

WARNING! If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in this section for further information.

SAFETY 125
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so 4
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. (Continued)

126 SAFETY
WARNING! ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM
THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. ONLY use the driver's side floor mat on the driver's side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
(Continued)

WARNING! ONLY use the passenger's side floor mat on the
passenger's side floor area. ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver's side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

127
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING! When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.

Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Place the ignition switch in the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure. Tip Start Feature Place the ignition switch in the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, place the ignition switch in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or

DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions -- Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Keyless Enter-N-Go -- With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the RUN position. 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Manual Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear. Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions -- Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions -- With Driver's Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: 1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the RUN position. 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position.

COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW 22°F OR -30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. 2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts. 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 5 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure. 4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts, allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

AFTER STARTING -- WARMING UP THE ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, and has not experienced an extended park condition as identified in "Extended Park Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
WARNING! Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)

WARNING! Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting Procedure" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless Enter-N-Go): To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN position. Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the RUN position to the STOP position), the power supply to the accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes. Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the ignition to STOP.

STARTING AND OPERATING 129

When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the window switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this function. After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting off the engine.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures

below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, behind to the driver's side headlamp. Follow the steps below to properly use the engine block heater:

1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver's side headlamp).

2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater cord in place.

3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the hook-and-loop strap, and properly stow away behind the driver's side headlamp.

130 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from an authorized Mopar dealer. The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Dealer Service" in "Servicing And Maintenance".
CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful. The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. You can engage the park brake in two ways: Manually, by applying the park brake switch. Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the Uconnect settings.

The park brake switch is located in the center console.
Electric Park Brake Switch To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages. Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate, however, it can only be released when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.

If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when the ignition switch is turned OFF. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the park brake is engaging. The park brake will release automatically when the ignition switch is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away. To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the park brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish. NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 131

WARNING! Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec-
tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in water or mud. Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the 5
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.

132 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain engaged.
WARNING! Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this event, urgent service of the electric park brake system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a manual transmission, whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings. Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.

SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN. For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met: Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal. The seat belt is unbuckled. The driver door is open. The vehicle is not in the PARK position. For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met: Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal. The clutch pedal is not pressed. The seat belt is unbuckled. The driver door is open. SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and back to ON/RUN again.

Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order to be activated: The vehicle must be at a standstill. The parking brake must be disabled. The transmission must be in park or neutral. The EPB switch not activated. The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position. The brake pedal not pressed. While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN.

NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated. When brake service work is complete, the following steps must be followed to reset the parking brake system to normal operation: Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. Press the brake pedal with moderate force. Apply the EPB Switch. NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster display if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the park brake fully applied. The park brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.

CAUTION! Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear selector as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal components. NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
Gear Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 133
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal and place the gear selector into the desired gear position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle of the selector). To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all the way left and then forward.

SHIFTING

Shift Pattern

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position.

134 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.

All Engines

Gear Selection Accel. Cruise

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

2 to 3

3 to 4

24 (39)

34 (55)

19 (31)

27 (43)

4 to 5 47 (76) 37 (60)

5 to 6 56 (90) 41 (66)

NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
DOWNSHIFTING
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.

STARTING AND OPERATING 135

CAUTION! Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal
depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the
clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower. Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage.

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.

Gear Selection Maximum Speed

6 to 5 80 (129)

Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

5 to 4

4 to 3

70 (113)

50 (81)

3 to 2 30 (48)

2 to 1 15 (24)

CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released).

136 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING
When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed as follows: Engage a gear (FIRST gear if facing uphill or REVERSE
if facing downhill) and leave the wheels turned. Stop the engine and engage the park brake. Always remove the key fob. Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle
is parked on a steep slope. NOTE: NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in neutral (or, if equipped with automatic transmission, before placing the gear lever in PARK).
WARNING! Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always remove the key fob when exiting the vehicle and take it with you.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
(Continued)

WARNING! Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop. Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is running or not), and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
SIX-SPEED OR NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed or nine-speed automatic transmission, depending on model. This section describes operation of both the six-speed and nine-speed transmission. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N), when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE (D) range for normal driving.

STARTING AND OPERATING 137
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE (R) while driving forward), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet 5
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer's driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

138 STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position will manually select the transmission gear. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information. NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector

Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. When exiting the vehicle, always: 1. Apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the ignition OFF. 4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.

NOTE: Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING! Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
(Continued)

CAUTION! Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position: When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the selector all the way forward until it stops and is fully seated. Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 139

REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the park brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition

to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that

limit your response to changing traffic or road

conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and

have a collision.

CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" and "Towing A Disabled Vehicle" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

140 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear (refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further information). Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the "Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may illuminate, and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and/or transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency.

Engagement of the torque converter clutch (and, for the nine-speed, shifts into 8th or 9th gear), are inhibited until the engine and/or transmission is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). Normal operation will resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a suitable level.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations. Operation When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.

Six-speed transmissions will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in six-speed models, or in 4WD LOW range, SNOW mode, or SAND mode, where available). Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE: When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick is not active. To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns OFF. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.

STARTING AND OPERATING 141
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION -- IF EQUIPPED
JEEP® ACTIVE DRIVE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input 5
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION! All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.

142 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal driving mode. NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h). Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4) The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select the following: 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW -- (Trailhawk models only) Active Drive Control -- If Equipped
4WD LOCK Switch

The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the following ways: When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to
any other off-road modes. Active Drive With Low Control -- (Trailhawk models only)
4WD LOW Switch (Trailhawk) The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, please follow the steps below:

Enabling 4WD LOW With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the ON/RUN position or with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster will display the message "4WD LOW" once the shift is complete. NOTE: Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and then
become active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is complete. The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD LOW" icon. Disabling 4WD LOW To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN -- IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best performance for all terrains.

MODE SELECTION GUIDE
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)

AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuverability and acceleration improvement compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off road on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on certain operating conditions), the transmission may use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as dry sand. The transmission is set to provide maximum traction.
MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass.
ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maximize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE: ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package. Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control. See "Electronic Brake Control System" in this section for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 143

POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a

safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be

obtained as soon as possible.

If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM" message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument cluster display, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED" message and an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster display, it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists.

144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. NOTE: Even if the power steering assistance is no longer oper-
ational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the engine. This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE "Autostop" mode.

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur: The system must be in STOP/START READY state.
A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. The vehicle must be completely stopped. The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the brake pedal depressed. The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop: Driver's seat belt is not buckled. Driver's door is not closed. Battery temperature is too warm or cold. Battery charge is low. The vehicle is on a steep grade.

Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed. HVAC set to MAX A/C. Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. The transmission is not in a forward gear. Hood is open. Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode. Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include: Accelerator pedal input. Engine temp too high. 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from previous
AUTOSTOP. Steering angle beyond threshold. Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode: The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE (D). To maintain cabin temperature comfort. HVAC is set to full defrost mode. HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted. Battery voltage drops too low. Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal
applications). Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed. A Stop/Start system error occurs. 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.

Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode: The drivers door is open and brake pedal released. The drivers door is open and the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled. The engine hood has been opened. A Stop/Start system error occurs. If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the engine may require a manual restart and the electric park brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START SYSTEM
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STARTING AND OPERATING 145

2. The "STOP/START OFF" message will appear in instrument cluster display. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the Stop/Start system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START SYSTEM

Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer to "Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. If the "SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM" message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Stop/Start OFF Switch

146 STARTING AND OPERATING
SPEED CONTROL -- IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons 1 -- On/Off 2 -- SET (+)/Accel 3 -- RES/Resume 4 -- SET (-)/Decel 5 -- CANC/Cancel NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Speed Control on. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

STARTING AND OPERATING 147

TO RESUME SPEED

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.

The following conditions will also deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory:

Vehicle parking brake is applied

Stability event occurs

Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE

Engine overspeed occurs

Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmission only)

Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF position erases the set speed from memory.

148 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 -- Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off 2 -- SET (+)/Accel 3 -- RES/Resume 4 -- SET (-)/Decel 5 -- Distance Setting Increase 6 -- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off 7 -- Distance Setting Decrease 8 -- CANC/Cancel

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter. ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE: If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. The Cruise Control system has two control modes: Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles. Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.

NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected. You can change the mode by using the cruise control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected. NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
WARNING! Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
(Continued)

WARNING! The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
In vehicles with automatic transmission, will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately three minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within three minutes, the parking brake will be activated and the ACC system will be canceled. (Continued)

WARNING! You should turn the ACC system off: When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes. When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes. When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display will read "ACC Ready."

STARTING AND OPERATING 149 To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off."
5
Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

150 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster display will read "ACC Ready." When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off." NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions: When in Four-Wheel Drive Low. When you apply the brakes. When the parking brake is applied. When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL. When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range. When the brakes are overheated. When the driver door is open at low speeds. When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds. When driver switches Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
to Full Off mode.

TO SET A DESIRED ACC SPEED
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed. If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs: The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the
instrument cluster display. The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
TO CANCEL
The following conditions cancel the system: The brake pedal is applied. The CANC button is pushed. An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs. The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).

The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied. Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds. Driver door is opened at low speeds. The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. Manual transmission is not in a forward gear,
if equipped. Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down for a fixed amount of time, if equipped. Manual transmission vehicle speed drops below
15 mph (24 km/h), if equipped.
TO TURN OFF
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if: The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
TO RESUME
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.

WARNING! The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings (if equipped). Refer to "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. To Decrease Speed While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings (if equipped). Refer to "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

STARTING AND OPERATING 151
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine's braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle. If equipped with a manual transmission, the ACC
system applies the brake down to 15 mph (24 km/h) 5
when following a target vehicle. If equipped with a automatic transmission, The ACC
system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).

152 STARTING AND OPERATING
SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)

Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long) Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)

Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). Once the longest setting is reached, if the button is pushed again it will be set to the shortest setting available. To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target Detected Light icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed. The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed. The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor. The distance setting is changed. The system disengages. Refer to the information on
ACC Activation. The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "BRAKE!" will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

Brake Alert NOTE: The "Brake!" Screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.
OVERTAKE AID
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

STARTING AND OPERATING 153

ACC OPERATION AT STOP

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.

If the target vehicle does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.

NOTE:

After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking

brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be

cancelled.

While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.

WARNING! When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

154 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) MENU
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status. Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following shows in the instrument cluster display: Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Off." Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read "Adaptive Cruise Control Ready." Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will read in the instrument cluster display: ACC SET When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in the instrument cluster display. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following: System Cancel Driver Override System Off

ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND MAINTENANCE
"Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will read "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" and the system will deactivate. The "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor" warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items: Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens. Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment. If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service. Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "Adaptive Cruise Control Off" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.

NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor"
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer. Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
"Clean Front Windshield" Warning
The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" warning will display and also a chime will indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will read "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" and the system will have degraded performance.

The "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality. NOTE: If the "ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield" message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display reads "ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required" or "Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required", there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 155
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance 5
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example

156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 157 To change between the different control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC on and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING! In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the 5
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message "CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/km/h" will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the speed is set.

158 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Decrease Speed When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: U.S. Speed (mph) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory: The brake pedal is applied. The CANC button is pushed. The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates. The vehicle parking brake is applied. The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated). The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position. Manual transmission is not in a forward gear,
if equipped. Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down, if equipped. The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if: The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST -- IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver). Refer to "ParkSense System Usage Precautions" for limitations of this system and recommendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. The system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if "Sound and Display" is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 159

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster display will show the park assist system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the center rear

region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the

display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects get

close to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle.

160 STARTING AND OPERATING

1 -- Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 2 -- Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 3 -- Fast Tone/Flashing Arc

Rear ParkSense Arcs
4 -- Slow Tone/Solid Arc 5 -- Slow Tone/Solid Arc 6 -- Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc

STARTING AND OPERATING 161

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance (inches/cm) Arcs -- Left Arcs -- Center Arcs -- Right
Audible Alert Chime
Radio Volume Reduced

Greater than 79 inches (200 cm)
None None None
None
No

79-59 inches (200-150 cm)
None 6th Solid
None Single, 1/2 second,
audible chime is heard.
Yes

WARNING ALERTS

59-47 inches (150-120 cm)

47-39 inches (120-100 cm)

None

5th Solid

4th Solid

None

39-25 inches (100-65 cm)
None 3rd Flashing
None

25-12 inches (65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing 2nd Flashing

Less than 12 inches (30 cm)
1st Flashing 1st Flashing 1st Flashing

Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle.

Continuous

Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Display" for more information. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

162 STARTING AND OPERATING
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see your authorized dealer. If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will read "PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.

ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc. are attached to the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE: If any objects are attached to the bumper within a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and cause false alerts and possibly blockage. The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.

WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION! ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
(Continued)

CAUTION! The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park-
Sense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
LANESENSE -- IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.

NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual warning to the driver when the driver's hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. The default status of LaneSense is "Off". To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button to turn the system on (LED turns off). A "LaneSense On" message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Lane Sense On Message

STARTING AND OPERATING 163

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button once to turn the system off (LED turns on). NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.

Base Instrument Cluster Display -- If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray

when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected

and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.

System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale

164 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale

Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale

Lane Sensed With Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale

When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Premium Instrument Cluster Display -- If Equipped When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.

STARTING AND OPERATING 165
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow, the left thin line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Thick Line, Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure.

System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale Left Lane Departure -- Only Left Lane Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense tell-
tale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.

166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure -- Both Lanes Detected When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left thick lane line flashes yellow and the left thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale stays solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: if approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning (Low/Medium/High) and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information. NOTE: The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-lock Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.). Use of the turn signals and Hazard Warning flashers also suppresses the warnings.

STARTING AND OPERATING 167

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to "Check Entire Surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.

NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for further information.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With Camera Delay turned on, the camera image can be disabled via the touchscreen X button when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE.

When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position.

A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zone Red Yellow Green

Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

168 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel. 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.

Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe 2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5. Wait 10 seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door. Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area. 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Fuel Funnel

3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING! Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled. Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the "Malfunction Indicator Light" to turn on. A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight 5
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

STARTING AND OPERATING 171

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.

Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible

with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch

and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

172 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)

Engine/Transmission

Model

Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)

Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.4L / Manual

FWD

Trailer towing is not recommended.

2.4L / Manual

4WD

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

200 lbs (90 kg)

2.4L / 6 Speed Auto

FWD or 4WD

Trailer towing is not recommended.

2.4L / 9 Speed Auto

4WD

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

200 lbs (90 kg)

When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.

Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.

The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.

TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle: The trailer tongue weight of the trailer. The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle. The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the tire loading information placard located on the driver's door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Weight Distribution

TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION! Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the "Scheduled Servicing". Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

WARNING! Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 173

WARNING!

Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.

GCWR must not be exceeded.

Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:

GVWR

GTW

GAWR

Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements -- Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING! Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle's wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. NOTE: Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle's electrical connect) into water. Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector 1 -- Ground 2 -- Park 3 -- Left Stop/Turn 4 -- Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes 5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

STARTING AND OPERATING 175

Automatic Transmission

Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on steep downhill grades, select the LOW range.

Speed Control -- If Equipped

Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

When using the Speed Control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

City Driving

In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

Temporarily turn off air conditioning.

176 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

TOWING CONDITION Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer

WHEELS OFF THE GROUND NONE REAR FRONT ALL

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK

NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled
or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.

RECREATIONAL TOWING -- FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the
transmission in PARK (P). Turn the engine OFF. 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not start
the engine. 6. Press and hold the brake pedal. 7. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB). 8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and release
the brake pedal.

CAUTION! Towing with the front wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face will be damaged.
RECREATIONAL TOWING -- 4X4 MODELS
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION! Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 177

DRIVING TIPS

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They

are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover.

178 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power (refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation -- If Equipped" in this section for further details). This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water, there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water:
CAUTION! When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave effects. Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting. Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). (Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Maintenance After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.

Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills. NOTE: Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose surface and rendering the vehicle stuck/immobile. If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING! If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.

NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive straight up or down. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and may provide traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill Descent Control if equipped (refer to "Safety Features" in the "Safety" section for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction. When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check
tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage. Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 179

Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING! Abrasive material in any part of the braking system may

cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking

performance. Full braking power may not be available

to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the

braking components as soon as possible.

Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance. Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely rectify imbalance condition.

180
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR -- IF EQUIPPED

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a SOS button.
WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

Assist And SOS Mirror
1 -- SOS Button 2 -- ASSIST Button

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber. The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM GuardianTM service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.

ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers: Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care In-vehicle support for SiriusXM GuardianTM. Vehicle Customer Care Total support for all other vehicle issues. SOS Call 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror. NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator: Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call The vehicle brand The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional assistance is needed.
WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 181

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.

Once a connection is made between the vehicle's SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection.

5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

182 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. Never place anything on or near the vehicle's operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle's electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.

SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red. The Device Screen will display the following message
"Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your authorized dealer." An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your authorized dealer."
WARNING! Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors: Delayed accessories mode is active The ignition is in the OFF position The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility Operator error by the SOS operator LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion Weather Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber. Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 183 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
6

184 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Lamps Front Courtesy Light Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) Interior Lights Dome Light (Glove Box)
Lamps Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL ) Front Direction Indicator Lamps Front Position Premium LED Front Fog Lamps

Interior Bulbs
C5W C5W C5W C5W HT-168 HT-168

Bulb Number

Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number H11LL 9005LL PSX24W 7444NA LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer) H11LL

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 185

Lamps Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) Side Indicators (Front Halogen) Side Indicators (Front HID) Side Indicators (Side View Mirror)
Tail/Brake Lights
Turn Indicators
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) License Plate Lamp Liftgate Lamp Reverse Liftgate Lamp Tail
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) HEADLAMPS -- IF EQUIPPED
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

D3S (HID) (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

W5W

LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL-M

W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps

W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps

LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

W21WLL

LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

WARNING! A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See an authorized dealer for service.

186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
Headlamps Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen The bulbs can be accessed from the wheel liner with the following procedure: 1. Turn the front wheels completely. 2. Remove the wheel liner. 3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp 1 -- Low Beam Bulb Cap 2 -- High Beam Bulb Cap 4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise
then pull outwards.

Headlamp Bulb Socket 5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb
connector and remove the bulb and socket. 6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it's
properly locked. 7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked. 8. Reinstall the wheel liner. NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
WARNING! Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of burns.

Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Turn the front wheels completely. 2. Remove the wheel liner. 3. Remove the electrical connectors. 4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top and bottom
locking tabs and squeeze to and remove the bulb. 5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb towards
housing. Be sure to hear both the top and bottom locking tabs "CLICK" to ensure the bulb is properly seated. 6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise direction and remove the bulb and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially to remove it from the socket. 7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise making sure that it is properly locked. 8. Reconnect the electrical connectors. 9. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. Front Fog Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Turn the front wheels completely. 2. Remove the wheel liner. 3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the bulb.

Rear Body Side Tail Lamps Contain the following: Position lights Stop lights Direction indicator To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.

1 -- Bulb

Fog Lamp Housing

5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector. 7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. Side Indicators The Side Indicators are LED. For their replacement see an authorized dealer.

Body Side Tail Lamp 1 -- Fasteners Caps

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 187
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away from the back of the vehicle.

Body Side Tail Lamp

1 -- Rear Body Side Tail Lamp

2 -- Ball Stud

188 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and
removing the bulb housing.

Reverse Side of Tail Lamp 1 -- Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb 2 -- Electrical Connector 3 -- Ball Studs
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked. 7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on the
car. 8. Reconnect the electrical connector. 9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align the
ball studs.

Body Side Tail Lamp 1 -- Rear Body Side Tail Lamp 2 -- Ball Stud
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate. NOTE: We advise referring to an authorized dealer. Reverse Lamps 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for
body side lamps, remove lift gate access cover for lift gate lamps.

Liftgate 1 -- Lift Gate Access Covers
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is properly locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector. 6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are
locked in correctly. 7. Finally close the tailgate. 3rd Stop Lamp The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement, see an authorized dealer.

License Plate Lights The License Plate light is LED. For their replacement, see an authorized dealer.
REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS
Front Courtesy Light To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
assembly.

Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 -- Retaining Clips 2 -- Bulb Housing

3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb housing.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 189 5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked. 6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it is
properly locked. Dome Light Vanity Mirror -- If Equipped To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror
frame with the mirror light cover attached. 2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly locked between the contacts.
6

Front Courtesy Light 2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.

Front Courtesy Bulb Housing 4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.

Visor 1 -- Visor Mirror Cover 2 -- Visor Mirror Light
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.

190 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Dome Light Glove Compartment To replace the bulb proceed as follows: 1. Open the glove compartment. 2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.

Dome Light To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove the
dome light.

3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts. 4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 1. Using thumb with slight pressure push bulb holder
to the side.

Bulb Removal/Installation 3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.

Grab Handle/Dome Light 2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.

Bulb Holder 2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing.

Bulb

Bulb Holder 3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb

WARNING! Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into account the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions with the risk of fire. Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the event of breakage be careful of the projection of fragments of glass. Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
NOTE: It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by an authorized dealer.

FUSES

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 191

WARNING!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an

authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

192 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSES/DISTRIBUTION UNIT
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment.

Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw Proceed as follows: 1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise. 2. Slowly release the screw. 3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw Proceed as follows: 1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide
completely from top to bottom. 2. Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied, in the rear cargo area. 3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise. 4. Release the screw.

Fuse Panel & Cover Location

Blade Fuses 1 -- Fuse Element 2 -- Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element. 3 -- Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse).
FUSE LOCATION
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the engine compartment.

1 -- Cover Screw 2 -- Fuse Cover

Fuse Panel & Cover

Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 -- Fuse Cover Tabs 2 -- Fuse Cover

Cavity F01 F02
F03 F04 F05 F06 F07
F08 F09 F10
F11
F14 F15 F16 F17 F18

Maxi Fuse 70 Amp Tan 70 Amp Tan
40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange

40 Amp Orange

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 193

Cartridge Fuse

Mini Fuse

Description

Module Body Computer

Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units

30 Amp Pink with HID Lamps 20 Amp Blue without HID Lamps

Supply Body Computer, HID Lamps

40 Amp Tan

Brake Control Electronics Module

40 Amp Tan

PTC Heater

Starter Relay

Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage

30 Amp Pink

7.5 Amp Brown

Supply For TCM, AGSM, Steering Control
ECM, TCM, Radiator Fan Control 6

20 Amp Yellow

Horn

20 Amp Yellow 1.4L Gas &

Diesel Engines 25 Amp Clear 2.4 L Engines/

ECM/PCM/UREA Fuel Injectors

UREA

7.5 Amp Brown

Diesel Crankcase Heater

Brake Control Module Pump

10 Amp Red

Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission

10 Amp Red

Engine Secondary Loads

20 Amp Yellow

12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered

194 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24
F30
F81 F82 F83 F84 F87 F88 F89 F90
Fxx

Maxi Fuse

60 Amp Blue

Cartridge Fuse

40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green

Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow Gas Engine 15 Amp Blue Diesel Engine 30 Amp Green
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow (Customer Selectable, Move From F18)

30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown 30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown

Description Air Conditioner Compressor
Cigar Lighter Fuel Pump
Gas - Ign Coil/Fuel Injector DieselDiesel Components
Window Heater Grid Electronic Unit Supply Automatic
Transmission 12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery Powered Glow Plug Module, DDCT SDU
Battery Feed Diesel Fuel Filter Heater
HVAC Fan Power Supply All Wheel Drive
Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
Heated Outside Mirrors Heated Rear Window IBS Sensor (Battery State Of
Charge) Dual Battery Control Relay With
NON DDCT Trans Dual Battery Control Relay With
DDCT Trans

The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on the bottom of the box.
Cavity F1 F2 F3

ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse 5 Amp Beige 10 Amp Red 2 Amp Grey

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
Description Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD)
ECM -- Start Diagnostic Sense Mod Steering Control

INTERIOR FUSES
The interior fuse panel is located in the driver compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.

Cavity F31 F33 F34
F36
F37 F38 F42 F43 F47 F48
F49

Blade Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown

Description

Occupant Restraint Controller

Window Motor Passenger

Window Motor Driver

Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV

Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower

Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release

Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering

Washer Pump Front And Rear

Rear Left Window Lifter

Rear Right Window Lifter

Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic Steering Lock, Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch

196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity F50
F51
F53 F94

Blade Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown
7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue

Description Occupant Restraint Controller Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow,
Haptic Lane Departure Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets

REAR CARGO FUSE/RELAY DISTRIBUTION UNIT
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.

To remove fuse cover, press on the tabs and lift upward.

holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle.

Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Access Door

Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Cover The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse

Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 -- Fuse Holder No. 1 2 -- Fuse Holder No. 2

Cavity F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8

Fuse Holder No. 1
Mini Fuse 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 30 Amp Green 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
Description Power Inverter Memory Seat Sun Roof If Equipped Power Seat (Passenger Side) Power Seat (Driver Side) Power Lumbar (Power Seats) Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats Heated Seats
6

198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Cavity F1 F5 F6 F7

Fuse Holder No. 2
Mini Fuse 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red

Description TTM IGN Feed Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side) Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side) TTM Jumper Battery Feed

On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / UNI-VAL fuse holder for the HIFI Audio System.

Cavity F01

Maxi Fuse 30 Amp Green

Description Power Liftgate

Cavity F02

ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse 25 Amp Clear

Description HIFI Audio System

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear storage compartment, below the spare tire. NOTE: Items may vary depending on the trim level.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.

Jack And Tools Location
1 -- Jack 2 -- Alignment Pin 3 -- Emergency Funnel 4 -- Wheel Bolt Wrench 5 -- Screwdriver

Load Floor Handle 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and
remove the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack 6
will be found beneath.

Spare Tire Fastener

200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate the
jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam tray. 5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
Jack And Tools 1 -- Wheel Bolt Wrench 2 -- Jack 3 -- Emergency Funnel 4 -- Screwdriver 5 -- Alignment Pin
WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.

PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P) (automatic
transmission) or REVERSE (R) (manual transmission). 5. Place the ignition in the OFF position. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the driver's front wheel is being changed, block the passenger's rear wheel.

Wheel Blocked NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
(Continued)

WARNING! Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack. Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack. Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench. 2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle. 3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.

Jack Warning Label

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
Jacking Locations
6
Front Lifting Point

202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Jacking Location Rear Lifting Point

CAUTION! Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

Rear Jacking Location 5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. 7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly
and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare tire. 8. Mount the spare tire.

Mounting Spare Tire NOTE: For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare. Refer to "Tires" in "Servicing And Maintenance"
for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and operation. 9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.

10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications" in "Technical Specifications" for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.
12. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far enough so that it is secured. Once placed in position, rotate it clockwise to lock it in. Replace the alignment pin in the center hole to lock the jack in place.
WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to "Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications" in "Technical Specifications" for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
TIRE SERVICE KIT -- IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Tire Service Kit Storage The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind the rear seat. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
6
Load Floor Handle

204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components 1 -- Mode Select Knob 2 -- Sealant/Air Hose 3 -- Hose Accessories 4 -- Sealant Bottle 5 -- Power Plug 6 -- Power Switch 7 -- Deflation Button 8 -- Pressure Gauge

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button once to turn the Tire Service Kit on. Push and release the Power Button again to turn the Tire Service Kit off.
Using The Deflation Button Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes overinflated.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to "Sealant Bottle Replacement" in this section. The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer. When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.

WARNING! Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage. If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire. If the wheel has any damage. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel. Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source. (Continued)

WARNING! A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle's
Hazard Warning Flashers.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition in the OFF position.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.

2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.

3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.

4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.

206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose: 1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on. 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire Service Kit on. 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.

If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

1.Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire Service Kit.
2.Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Proceed to "Drive Vehicle."
Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.

After Driving: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to "Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit" in this section before continuing. 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode position.

If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. Refer to "Sealant Bottle Replacement". NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. Sealant Bottle Replacement: 1. Unwrap the power cord. 2. Unwrap the hose.
6

7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge.

Unwrap The Hose

208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.

WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Remove The Bottle NOTE: For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order. Replacement sealant bottles are available at autho-
rized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.

Battery Post Cover

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF/LOCK.
WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Positive Battery Post
WARNING! Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P) (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING! Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown)
6
WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence.

210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an emergency is described in the "Emergency Gas Can Refueling" procedure. Refer to "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel

Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action. On the highways -- slow down. In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Apply the park brake. 3. Grasp the boot material rearward of the gear selector
and pull up to carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot assembly from the center console.
Gear Selector Bezel

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right rear corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold the override release lever down.

Gear Selector Override Access Hole

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.

212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) (for automatic transmission) or SECOND gear and REVERSE (for manual transmission) while gently pressing the accelerator. NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission, shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE: Push the "ESC OFF" switch (if necessary), to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Safety" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC OFF" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed

Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Rear Front ALL

FWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. NOTE: You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings. Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode. Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's door is opened by pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB. If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Gear Selector Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can be moved.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
4X4 MODELS NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ONLY METHOD
CAUTION! Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not 6
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF mode. The only approved method of towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS -- WITH KEY FOB
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. The Electric Park Brake does not need to be released if all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

4X4 MODELS
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION! Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS -- IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side of the vehicle. NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location

Rear Tow Hook Location
Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and subsequently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the door. During towing, remember that not having the aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power steering will require greater force when applying the brakes and steering of the vehicle.

WARNING! Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death. Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION! Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that

will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems

performed under certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road

obstacle.

Please refer to "Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety" for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

216
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Change Oil" or "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Instrument Cluster Display" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these conditions. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level. Check windshield washer fluid level. Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed. Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" on the following page for the required maintenance intervals. Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect the CV/Universal joints Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions

32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000

20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years:

Or Kilometers:

If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road

conditions, inspect the air cleaner filter, and

replace if necessary.

Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X

Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary.

Replace engine air cleaner filter.

144,000

90,000

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 217

150,000

140,000

130,000

120,000

100,000 110,000

10 11

240,000

224,000

208,000

192,000

160,000 176,000

X X
7
X

218 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

150,000

140,000

130,000

120,000

100,000 110,000

90,000

20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years:

10 11

240,000

224,000

208,000

192,000

160,000 176,000

144,000

32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000

Or Kilometers:

Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.

Replace spark plugs.1

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

X
X X

WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L ENGINE
1 -- Engine Air Cleaner Filter 2 -- Engine Oil Fill 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 4 -- Battery 5 -- Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 219
7
6 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 -- Secondary Battery 8 -- Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap 9 -- Engine Oil Dipstick

220 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. There are four possible dipstick types; Crosshatched zone. Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking.
CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual washer fluid. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING! Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to "Jump Starting Procedure" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION! It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.

PRESSURE WASHING
CAUTION! Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

ENGINE OIL
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the "Scheduled Servicing" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection -- 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 221

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 2.4L Engine

Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395 or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil fill cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the

recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the

recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter

changes are followed. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil

certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

222 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Be sure to follow the "Severe Duty Conditions" maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING! Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located in your owner's information kit, for further warranty information. The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a -- If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-1234yf -- If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.

BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 223
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help reduce streaking and smearing. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, 7
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

224 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION! Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the locking tab.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade 1 -- Wiper 2 -- Locking Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm

Wiper Locking Assembly 1 -- Wiper 2 -- Locking Tab
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper arm.

1 -- Locking Tab 2 -- Wiper 3 -- Release Tab

Wiper Disengaging

4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).

Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
1 -- Wiper 2 -- Locking Tab 3 -- Wiper Arm J Hook

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 225
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Blade 3 -- Wiper Arm

6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position. 2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open. 3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position 1 -- Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 -- Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.

3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp

the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper

arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the

wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the

wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end

of the wiper arm.

NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.

226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 -- Wiper Blade 2 -- Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 -- Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 -- Wiper Arm 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. Installing The Rear Wiper 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.

Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place. 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips" in "Safety" for further information. A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION! The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion. Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle. Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not. When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 227

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Cooling System -- Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible

sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).

Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

228 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information. NOTE: Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any "globally compatible" coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE: It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local authorized dealer. Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING! Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 229

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.

If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the "Brake Warning Light" is illuminated. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.
WARNING! Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid.
Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)

WARNING! Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Please see an authorized dealer for service.

Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION -- IF EQUIPPED
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to "Fluids And Lubricants" in "Technical Specifications" for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life

of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings
Tire Markings 1 -- US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 -- Size Designation 3 -- Service Description 4 -- Maximum Load 5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE: P (Passenger) -- Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. European -- Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) -- Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233

TIRE SIZING CHART

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235

EXAMPLE: 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd
week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
LOADING
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in the "Starting And Operating" section of this manual. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit--
(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if "XXX" amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. NOTE: If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7

238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: Safety Fuel Economy Tread Wear Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Safety
WARNING! Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)

WARNING! Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE: Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. At least once a month: Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always

reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture

and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could

damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure". Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: The tire has not been driven on when flat. The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable). The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires -- If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. NOTE: TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.
WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire

Tire Tread

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241

Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: Driving style. Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Distance driven. Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You

could lose control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death.

NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators" in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the "Tire Safety Information" section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING! Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires -- If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires -- If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "In Case Of Emergency" for further information.

CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the "Towing Requirements - Tires" in "Starting And Operating" for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel -- If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING! Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare -- If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare -- If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING! Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage: Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer. Install on front tires only.

For a 215/65R16 tire, use of a snow traction device with a maximum projection of 7 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.
NOTE: Any aftermarket tire add on like tire chains may effect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) feature performance.
WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:

Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.

Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

(Continued)

CAUTION! Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. Observe the traction device manufacturer's instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer's if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the "Maintenance Plan" for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the "forward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following diagram.

CAUTION! Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245

TREADWEAR

The Treadwear grade is a comparative

rating, based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and one-half times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices, and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)

246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TRACTION GRADES The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE GRADES The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a month, observe the following precautions: Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly. Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During storage check battery charge quarterly. If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical system, check the battery charge every 30 days. Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes. Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying protective waxes.

Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades and leave raised from the glass.
Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care not to damage the painted surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface of the vehicle.
Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than recommended on the tire placard and check it periodically.
Do not drain the engine cooling system. Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five minutes, with the air conditioning system on and high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication of the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation. NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.
CAUTION! Before removal of the positive and negative terminals to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch in the OFF position and close the driver's door. When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver's door is closed.

BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are: Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. Stone and gravel impact. Insects, tree sap and tar. Salt in the air near seacoast localities. Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247

BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION! Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure -- If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel. Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249

Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not

disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.).

250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. 2. Dry with a soft cloth.

LEATHER PARTS
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.

GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

251
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the windshield and is visible from the outside of the vehicle.
Vehicle Identification Number NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)

**Lug Nut/Bolt Size
M12 x 1.25

Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size
19 mm

**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/ bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
8

252 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTE: If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.
Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having a octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline". Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION! DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: Operate in a lean mode. OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on. Poor engine performance. Poor cold start and cold drivability. Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 253
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
8

254 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
(Continued)

CAUTION! The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

FLUID CAPACITIES

Fuel (Approximate)

2.4L Gasoline Engine

13.5 Gallons

Engine Oil With Filter

2.4L Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)

5.5 Quarts

Cooling System*

2.4L Gasoline Engine Mopar Antifreeze/ Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula

6.8 Quarts

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 255 Metric 51 Liters 5.2 Liters 6.5 Liters
8

256 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
ENGINE
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 2.4L Engine
CHASSIS
Component Manual Transmission If Equipped Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) If Equipped
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) If Equipped
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) If Equipped
Rear Differential (RDM) If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Miles (240,000 Kilometers) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid. Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5). We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.

257
MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement. NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING! It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle's systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
(Continued)

WARNING! As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

NOTE:

FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.

Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot

be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your

consent. For further information, refer to "Data Collection

& Privacy" in your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement

or "Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity" in

"Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel".

258 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting. Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES -- UCONNECT 4 SETTINGS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle's options, feature settings may vary. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting "option" until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch display radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name Language

English

Selectable Options Français

MULTIMEDIA 259 Español

Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Display Mode

Auto

Display Brightness Headlights On

Display Brightness Headlights Off

AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon Connection

Touchscreen Beep

Control Screen Timeout -- If Equipped

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster -- If Equipped

Selectable Options

Manual Off Off Off Off

Units

After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Units

Metric

Custom

NOTE:

The "Metric" option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.

The "Custom" option allows setting the "Distance, Fuel Consumption" (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100km, or km/L), "Pressure" (kPa or bar), and "Temperature" (C or F) units of measurement independently.

260 MULTIMEDIA

Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length
Show Command List

Brief Always

Selectable Options With Help

Detailed

Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Set Time Hours

NOTE: The "Set Time Hours" feature will allow you to adjust the hours.

Set Time Minutes

NOTE: The "Set Time Minutes" feature will allow you to adjust the minutes.

Time Format

12 hrs AM

Set Date

Up Arrow

NOTE: Within the "Set Date" setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.

Show Time in Status -- If Equipped

Sync Time With GPS -- If Equipped

Selectable Options

Never
24 hrs PM Down Arrow Off Off

MULTIMEDIA 261

Safety/Driving Assistance -- If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) -- If Equipped

Off

Warning Only

Warning + Active Braking

NOTE: The "Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)" setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the "Warning Only" option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the "Warning + Active Braking" option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity -- If Equipped

Near

Medium

Far

NOTE: The "Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity" setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system will warn you of a possible collision based on the option selected. "Far" will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas "Near" will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.

LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped

Early

Medium

Late

NOTE: The "LaneSense Warning" setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.

LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped

Low

Med

High

ParkSense -- If Equipped

Sound

Sound and Display

Rear ParkSense Volume -- If Equipped

Low

Medium

High

Blind Spot Alert -- If Equipped

Off

Lights

Lights and Chime

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.

262 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Selectable Options

ParkView Backup Camera Delay

Off

NOTE: The "ParkView Backup Camera Delay" setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle's speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the Off position.

ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Off

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers -- If Equipped

Off

Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto Park Brake

Off

Brake Service -- If Equipped

Yes

NOTE: Selecting the "Brake Service" feature will display a pop-up asking whether you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.

MULTIMEDIA 263

Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Interior Ambient Lights -- If Equipped

NOTE: The "Interior Ambient Lights" setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.

Headlight Sensitivity -- If Equipped

Level 1: minimum sensitivity

Level 2: medium sensitivity

Level 3: maximum sensitivity

NOTE: The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).

Headlight Off Delay

NOTE: When the "Headlight Off Delay" feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.

Greeting Lights

Off

Daytime Running Lights

Off

NOTE: When the "Daytime Running Lights" feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped

Off

Cornering Lights

Off

NOTE:

When the "Cornering Lights" feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on

the relevant side to improve visibility at night.

Flash Lights With Lock -- If Equipped

Off

264 MULTIMEDIA

Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto Unlock On Exit

Off

NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.

Flash Lights With Lock

Off

Sound Horn with Lock

Off

1st Press

2nd Press

Sound Horn with Remote Start

Off

Remote Door Unlock

Driver Door

All Doors

Auto-On Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped

Off

Remote Start

All Starts

NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.

Engine Off Options -- If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Headlight Off Delay
Radio Off Delay Radio Off With Door

+ 0 min
On

Selectable Options

MULTIMEDIA 265
20 min
Off

Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Balance & Fade

NOTE: When in this display, you may adjust the "Balance & Fade" of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker icon toward any location in the box.

Equalizer

Bass

Mid

Treble

NOTE: When in this display, you may adjust the "Bass", "Mid", and "Treble" settings. Adjust the settings with the + and setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.

Speed Adjusted Volume Loudness

Off

NOTE: The "Loudness" feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.

266 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Selectable Options

AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped

NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Auto Play -- If Equipped

Off

NOTE: The "Auto Play" feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.

Radio Off With Door -- If Equipped

Off

NOTE: The "Radio Off With Door" feature will keep the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the "Radio Off Delay" selected time has expired.

Phone
After pressing the Phone button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Do Not Disturb

Do Not Disturb Options

Paired Phones And Audio Devices

List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices

NOTE: This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. Refer to "Phone Mode" in the "Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display" section for further details.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster -- If Equipped

Off

MULTIMEDIA 267

SiriusXM® Setup -- If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Tune Start

Off

Channel Skip

List Of Channels

NOTE: SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Info

Sirius ID

NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Restore Settings

Yes

NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset the audio settings to their default.

Cancel
9

268 MULTIMEDIA

Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Clear Personal Data -- If Equipped

Yes

NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

Selectable Options

Cancel

CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES -- UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV SETTINGS

Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the available programmable features. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle's options, feature settings may vary.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting "option" until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings. The following tables list the settings that may be found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio, along with the selectable options pertaining to each setting.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 -- Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

MULTIMEDIA 269

Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Set Language

Off

NOTE: When the "Set Language" feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Display Mode

Auto

Manual

Display Brightness With Headlights ON

NOTE: To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.

Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.

Set Theme Options

Off

NOTE: When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.

Touchscreen Beep

Off

Control Screen Time-Out

Off

270 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Selectable Options

NOTE: When the "Control Screen Time-Out" feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.

Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster -- If Equipped

Off

NOTE: When the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster" feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster

Off

Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Units

Metric

Custom

NOTE:

The "Metric" option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.

The "Custom" option allows setting the "Fuel Consumption" (L/100km or km/L), "Pressure" (kPa or bar), and "Temperature" (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.

Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name Voice Response Length
Show Command List

Brief Never

Selectable Options W/Help

Detailed

Always

Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Sync Time With GPS -- If Equipped

Set Time Hours

NOTE: The "Set Time Hours" feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync Time With GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Set Time Minutes

NOTE: The "Set Time Minutes" feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync Time With GPS" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.

Time Format

12 hrs

Show Time in Status Bar -- If Equipped

MULTIMEDIA 271
Off 24 hrs Off

Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

ParkView Backup Camera Delay

Off

NOTE:

The "ParkView Backup Camera Delay" setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle's speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched

to the OFF position.

272 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines

Off

NOTE: The "Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines" feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines -- If Equipped

Off

Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity -- If Equipped

Near

Medium

Far

Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) -- If Equipped

Off

Only Warning

Warning + Active Braking

NOTE: The "Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+)" setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the "Only Warning" option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision and more brake pressure is needed. When the "Warning + Active Braking" option is selected, it will apply the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.

LaneSense Warning -- If Equipped

Early

Medium

Late

NOTE: The "LaneSense Warning" setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.

LaneSense Strength -- If Equipped

Low

Med

High

ParkSense -- If Equipped

Sound Only

Sound & Display

MULTIMEDIA 273

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Rear ParkSense Volume

Low

Med

High

Blind Spot Alert -- If Equipped

Off

Lights

Lights & Chime

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) not operating to specification.

Mirrors and Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers -- If Equipped

Selectable Options Off

Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto Park Brake

Off

Brake Service -- If Equipped

Yes

NOTE:
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle-integrated, menu-driven system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear 9
foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).

274 MULTIMEDIA

Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Headlight Sensitivity -- If Equipped

Level 1: minimum sensitivity Level 2: medium sensitivity

Level 3: maximum sensitivity

Headlight Off Delay

0 sec

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.

Headlight Illumination On Approach

0 sec

30 sec

60 sec

90 sec

Greeting Lights -- If Equipped

Off

Daytime Running Lights

Off

NOTE: When the "Daytime Running Lights" feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Cornering Lights

Off

NOTE: When the "Cornering Lights" feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.

Flash Lights With Lock -- If Equipped

Off

Interior Ambient Lights -- If Equipped

NOTE: The "Interior Ambient Lights" setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.

Auto Dim High Beams -- If Equipped

Off

NOTE: When the "Auto Dim High Beams" feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.

MULTIMEDIA 275

Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto Unlock On Exit

Off

NOTE: When the "Auto Unlock On Exit" feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N) position, and the driver's door is opened.

Flash Lights With Lock

Off

Sound Horn With Lock -- If Equipped

Off

1st Press

2nd Press

Sound Horn With Remote Start -- If Equipped

Off

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

Driver Door

All Doors

NOTE: When "Driver Door" is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers' doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "All Doors," all doors will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed for only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver's door opening. If "Driver Door" is programmed, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).

Passive Entry -- If Equipped

Off

NOTE:

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

276 MULTIMEDIA

Auto-On Comfort Systems -- If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start -- If Equipped

Off

Remote Start

All Starts

Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay -- If Equipped

Radio Off Delay

0 min

NOTE: When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for 20 minutes, or until the first door is opened after the engine is shut off.

20 min

Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Balance/Fade

Speaker Icon

NOTE: When in this display, you may adjust the "Balance/Fade" of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.

MULTIMEDIA 277

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Equalizer

Bass

Mid

Treble

Speed Adjusted Volume

Off

Surround Sound -- If Equipped

Off

AUX Volume Offset -- If Equipped

NOTE: This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Do Not Disturb

List of Settings

NOTE: Press "Do Not Disturb" to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).

Paired Phones and Audio Devices

List Of Paired Phones and Audio Devices

NOTE:

This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster -- If Equipped

Off

Smartphone Projection Manager -- If Equipped

Off

278 MULTIMEDIA

SiriusXM® Setup -- If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Tune Start

Off

Channel Skip

List Of Channels

Subscription Information

Sirius ID

1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Reset App Drawer

Restore Settings

NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.

Clear Personal Data

NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

Selectable Options

MULTIMEDIA 279
Cancel Cancel Cancel

System Information
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Selectable Options

Software Licenses

Software Information Screen

NOTE: When this feature is selected, a "Licensing Information" screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio.

Map Update -- If Equipped

Download System Information To USB

Generate Request Code

NOTE: The "Download System Information To USB" will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the "Generate Request Code" will display a code for the user

to input online when downloading the maps.

280 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
SAFETY GUIDELINES
WARNING! ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner. Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen. Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage. Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If
prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake. Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for repair. Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.

Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully before using your system to ensure proper usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or the system at loud volumes. Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE: Many features of this system are speed dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion. Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen surface! Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen. If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. 1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode. 2. Media Press the Media button on the touchscreen to access media sources such as USB Device, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the requested media is present. 3. Climate Refer to "Climate Controls" in "Getting To Know Your Vehicle" for further details. 4. Apps Press the Apps button on the touchscreen to access Smartphone and Connected vehicle options. 5. Controls Press the Controls button on the touchscreen to adjust the heated and vented seats or heated steering wheel (if equipped). 6. Phone Press the Phone button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Phone feature. 7. Settings Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to access the Uconnect Settings menu.

Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu 1. Press the Apps button to open the App screen. 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut. NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.

MULTIMEDIA 281

RADIO MODE

Radio Controls

The radio is equipped with the following modes:

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio If Equipped

Press the Radio button on the touchscreen, bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons in the Radio mode.

Volume/Power Control

Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off the screen and mute the radio. Push the Volume/Power control knob a second time to turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control knob clockwise increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.

Tune/Scroll Control

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set

at the same volume level as last played.

Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to

increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station

frequency. Push the Enter/Browse button to choose a

selection.

282 MULTIMEDIA
Screen Close The X button on the touchscreen at the top right provides a means to close the Direct Tune Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds. Seek And Direct Tune Functions The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right and left of the radio station display or by pressing the left Steering Wheel Audio Control up or down. Seek Up Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began. Fast Seek Up Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. Seek Down Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel. During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Down Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channel at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released. Direct Tune Press the Tune button on the touchscreen located at the bottom of the radio screen. The Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired station or channel. Press the available number button on the touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be reached) will become deactivated/greyed out. Undo You can backspace an entry by pressing the bottom left on the touchscreen. OK Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press the OK button, and the Direct Tune screen will close. The system will automatically tune to that station. The selected Station or Channel number is displayed in the Direct Tune text box.

Setting Presets
Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pressing any of the six preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen. When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep. The radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio Modes. A set of six presets are visible at the top of the radio screen. You can switch between the two radio presets by pressing the Arrow button located in the upper right of the radio touchscreen. Browse In AM/FM When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen provides a means to edit the Presets List and is entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button. Scrolling Preset List Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.

Preset Selection From List A preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed presets or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted preset. When selected, the radio tunes to the station stored in the preset and returns to the main radio screen. Deleting Presets A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the corresponding preset. Return To Main Radio Screen You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by pressing the X button on the touchscreen when in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode -- If Equipped
NOTE: Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and others. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription based service. SiriusXM® All Access Package All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access package, providing over 160 channels of the best programming for all the places life takes you.

In your vehicle -- You'll get every channel available on your radio, including all the premium programming like Howard Stern, every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go -- With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio subscription included with the All Access trial, you'll get SiriusXM® on your computer, smartphone, or tablet. Including: A huge On Demand catalog Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM® Latino a collection of Spanish-language channels MySXM allowing you to personalize your favorite music channels
Go to https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin for more information SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

MULTIMEDIA 283

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.

If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might have to change the vehicle's position in order to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels.

No Subscription

Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the Radio does not have the necessary subscription, the Radio is able to receive the Pre-View channel only.

Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription

To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription, US residents call:

1-800-643-2112

Canadian residents call:

1-877-438-9677

NOTE: You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.

The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the SXM

button on the touchscreen.

When in Satellite mode:

The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.

The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the screen.

The Genre is displayed below the Presets Bar.

284 MULTIMEDIA
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune. In addition to the tuning Operation functions common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/Weather Jump, and fav button functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
REPLAY
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost. Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/ pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time. You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen, any time during the Replay mode. Play/Pause Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen.

Rewind Press the RW button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. Forward Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can not be done for live content. A continuous press of the FW button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The Radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released. Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume playing of Live content.
FAVORITES
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to activate the favorites menu, which will time out in five seconds in absence of user interaction. You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X in the top right corner. The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist, or song that is currently playing. The Radio then uses this information to alert you when either the favorite song, or favorite artist are being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in the Radio is 50.

Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on the touchscreen. Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List. This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by pressing the Back Arrow. All Press the All button at the left of the Browse Screen. Channel List Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Genre Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the selected Genre.

Presets Press the Presets button located at the left of the Browse screen. You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up and down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Preset Selection A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select the currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio screen. Deleting A Preset A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the corresponding Preset. Favorites Press the Favorites button located at the left of the Browse screen. The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit the Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Favorites list. You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and Down arrows located at the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.

Remove Favorites Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted. Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels. Game Zone Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts. On-Air Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio to that channel. Select Teams Press the Select Teams button on the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear, then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.

MULTIMEDIA 285
Remove Selection Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen. Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be deleted. Alert Settings Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from "Alert me to on-air games upon start" or "Alert upon score update" or both when one or more of your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels. Featured Press the Featured button, located on the left of the Browse screen. This feature provides a list of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio main menu or within the Settings main menu to activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and Radio Off With Door. You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the X located at the top right.
9

286 MULTIMEDIA Balance & Fade

Equalizer

Speed Adjusted Volume

Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.

Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen. Press the + or buttons, or press and drag over the level bar for each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.

Surround Sound -- If Equipped Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate this feature. When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.

Loudness

AUX Volume Offset

MULTIMEDIA 287

Surround Sound

Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to activate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.

AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing the + and buttons. This alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.

288 MULTIMEDIA Auto Play
Auto Play Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to activate the Auto Play screen. The Auto Play feature has two settings On and Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play from a connected device immediately after it is connect to the radio.

Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door Press the Radio Off With Door button on the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.

MEDIA MODE
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB Port or by pressing the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then selecting USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped). Seek Up /Seek Down Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection or to return to the beginning of the previous selection if the USB device/iPod® is within the first three seconds of the current selection.

Browse Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to display the browse window. The left side of the browse window displays a list of ways you can browse through the contents of the USB device/iPod®. If supported by the device, you can browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left side of the screen. The center of the browse window shows items and their sub-functions, which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/ Scroll knob can also be used to scroll. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: USB. Repeat Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The radio will continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as repeat is active. Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. Shuffle Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.

Info Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the Info button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature. Tracks Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below the song title. When in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the line above and below the track name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.
AUX Mode
Overview AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the left side of the display.

MULTIMEDIA 289
Inserting Auxiliary Device Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play. Controlling The Auxiliary Device The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device. NOTE: The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: AUX. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.
9

290 MULTIMEDIA
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the Uconnect System. Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect System. NOTE: See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect Phone section for more details. To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select Source button on the left side of the display, and then select "Bluetooth®".
Bluetooth® Mode

Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second of the current selection. Media Mode Press the Media button on the touchscreen to select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®. Tracks If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above and below the song title. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up. Audio Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio settings.

Android AutoTM & Apple CarPlay® -- If Equipped
ANDROID AUTOTM NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android AutoTM features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Android AutoTM is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your AndroidTM 6.0 or higher powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android AutoTM automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just when they are needed. Android AutoTM can be used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android AutoTM, follow the following procedure: 1. Download the Android AutoTM app from the Google
Play store on your AndroidTM-powered smartphone. 2. Connect your AndroidTM-powered smartphone to one
of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If the Android AutoTM app was not downloaded, the first time you plug your device in, the app will begin to download.

NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android AutoTM And LTE Data Coverage 3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Android AutoTM Icon. Android AutoTM should launch, but if it does not, refer to "Android AutoTM And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks" in this section for the procedure to enable the feature AutoShow. You can also launch it by touching the Android AutoTM icon on the touchscreen.

Once Android AutoTM is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your smartphone's data plan: Google MapsTM for navigation Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for music Hands-free Calling, and Texting for communication Hundred of compatible apps NOTE: To use Android AutoTM, make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Android AutoTM may use cellular data, and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen. NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running AndroidTM 6.0 or higher and download app on Google Play. AndroidTM, Android AutoTM and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
ANDROID AUTOTM MAPS
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take you to a desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in Android AutoTM to access Google MapsTM. NOTE: If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system.

MULTIMEDIA 291
While using Android AutoTM, Google MapsTM provides voice-guided: Navigation Live traffic information Lane guidance

Android AutoTM Maps

For further information, refer to www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/ auto (Canadian Residents).

For further information on the navigation function, please

refer to https://support.google.com/android or https://

support.google.com/androidauto/.

292 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTOTM MUSIC
Android AutoTM allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like Google Play Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone's data plan, you can stream endless music on the road. NOTE: Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to using Android AutoTM, for them to work with Android AutoTM. NOTE: To see the metadata for the music playing through Android AutoTM, select the Uconnect System's media screen. For further information refer to https:// support.google.com/androidauto.
ANDROID AUTOTM COMMUNICATION
With Android AutoTM connected, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to the Android AutoTM. This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, have incoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
ANDROID AUTOTM APPS
The Android AutoTM App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android AutoTM, every time it is launched. You must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed into the app for it to work with Android AutoTM. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of available apps for Android AutoTM.

APPLE CARPLAY® INTEGRATION NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more. To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first connection only, and then use the following procedure: 1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle. NOTE: Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work. 2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the
Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay® icon. Apple CarPlay® should launch, but if not, refer to "Android AutoTM And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks" in this section for the procedure to enable the feature AutoShow. You can also touch the Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to launch it.

Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Uconnect system, the following features can be utilized using your iPhone's® data plan: Phone Music Messages Maps NOTE: To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen. NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

APPLE CARPLAY® PHONE
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition session. You can also press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®. NOTE: Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a Siri session, and it will not function with Apple CarPlay®.
APPLE CARPLAY® MUSIC
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®. Using your iPhone's® data plan, you can also use select third party audio apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
APPLE CARPLAY® MESSAGES
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also read incoming text messages, but drivers will not be able to read messages, as everything is done via voice.

APPLE CARPLAY® MAPS
To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination. Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by pressing Destinations and selecting a category, by launching Siri from the destinations page, or even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps NOTE: If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held, and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any navigation command said launches the built-in Uconnect navigation system.

MULTIMEDIA 293 APPLE CARPLAY® APPS To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®, you must have the compatible app downloaded, and you must be signed into the app. Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®. ANDROID AUTOTM AND APPLE CARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS AutoPlay AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system that automatically begins playing music off of the connected device, as soon as it is connected. This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio Settings category. Its default setting is on. NOTE: AutoPlay is not supported by Android AutoTM.
9

294 MULTIMEDIA
Android AutoTM Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing After connecting to Android AutoTM for the first time and undergoing the setup procedure, the smartphone will automatically pair to the Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth® is turned on. NOTE: Android AutoTM features cannot be used with Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its use. Android AutoTM uses both Bluetooth® and USB connections to function, and the connected device will be unavailable to other devices when connected using Android AutoTM. Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect System It is possible to have multiple devices connected to the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android AutoTM/ Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one that will be used to place hands-free phone calls or send hands-free text messages. However, another device can also be paired to the Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the passenger can stream music. NOTE: If using a Samsung device, every time it is connected to
a media USB, and there is another device plugged in, you will need to manually change the configuration of the USB connection in order for the Samsung device to send data. The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will be unavailable when Android AutoTM/Apple CarPlay® are in use.

PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu 1 -- Favorite Contacts 2 -- Mobile Phone Battery Life 3 -- Currently Paired Mobile Phone 4 -- Siri 5 -- Mute Microphone 6 -- Transfer To/From Uconnect System 7 -- Conference Call* 8 -- Phone Settings 9 -- Text Messaging** 10 -- Direct Dial Pad 11 -- Recent Call Log 12 -- Browse Phone Book Entries 13 -- End Call

14 -- Call/Redial/Hold 15 -- Do Not Disturb 16 -- Reply With Text Message * -- Conference Call feature only available on Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices ** -- Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Access Profile (MAP)]
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone. Uconnect Phone supports the following features: Voice Activated Features Hands-Free dialing via Voice ("Call John Smith Mobile"
or "Dial 248-555-1212"). Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages. Hands-Free text message replying. (Forward one of
18 pre-defined SMS messages to incoming calls/text messages). Redialing last dialed numbers ("Redial"). Calling back the last incoming call number ("Call Back"). Viewing call logs on screen ("Show incoming calls," "Show outgoing calls," "Show missed calls," "Show recent calls") Searching contacts phone number ("Search for John Smith Mobile").

NOTE: Examples of Voice Commands are provided throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the Voice Command Quick Reference Section. Screen Activated Features Dialing via keypad using touchscreen. Viewing and calling contacts from phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen. Setting favorite contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the main phone screen. Viewing and calling contacts from recent call logs. Reviewing your recent incoming SMS. Listening to music on your Bluetooth® device via the
touchscreen. Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly. NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly. Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system automatically mutes your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For Uconnect customer support: US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call:
877-855-8400

Canadian residents - (English) call: 800-465-2001 or (French) call: 800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.
WARNING! ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology -- the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time.

MULTIMEDIA 295
Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone button on your steering wheel is used to get into the phone mode and make calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc. Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command button on your steering wheel is only used for "barge in" and when you are already in a call and you want to send tones or make another call. The button on your steering wheel is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the button. The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods 9
for how Voice Command works: 1. Say compound commands like "Call John Smith
mobile". 2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.

296 MULTIMEDIA
You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options. Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the "Listen" prompt or another prompt. For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Call" and then "John Smith" and then "mobile", the following compound command can be said: "Call John Smith mobile." For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound command form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound command form voice command "Search for John Smith," or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands: "Search Contacts" and when asked "John Smith." Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out certain non-word utterances and sounds such as "ah" and "eh." The system handles fill-in words such as "I would like to."

The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as "make a phone call" and "to Kelly Smith". For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow-up prompt such as "Who do you want to call?" in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized. The system utilizes continuous dialog -- when the system requires more information from the user, it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pushing the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep. To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a command or say "Help." All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if active) on the radio control head.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. You can also push the VR button or Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu.

PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE PHONE
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system. To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information. NOTE: You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure. The vehicle must be in PARK. 1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. 2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on the
touchscreen. NOTE: If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone. 3. Select "Yes" to begin the pairing process. 4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Press the Settings button on your mobile phone. Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is enabled. Once
enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® connections.

Pairing A Phone
If "No" is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen. Select "Paired Phones", and then press the Add
Device button on the touchscreen. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, select "Uconnect" and accept the connection request. 5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen while the system is connecting. 6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system, select "Uconnect". 7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from Uconnect Phone. NOTE: Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN.

8. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting "Yes" will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If "No" is selected, simply select "Uconnect" from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE: Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone's Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR ADDITIONAL MOBILE PHONES
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen. 3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen. 4. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen while the system is connecting.

MULTIMEDIA 297

5. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting "Yes" will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher priority. You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio: "Show Paired Phones" "Connect My Phone"

PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO DEVICE

1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to begin.

2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.

3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen to display the Paired Audio Devices screen.

4. Press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the system,

a pop-up will appear.

5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.

298 MULTIMEDIA
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device. Selecting "Yes" will make this device the highest priority. This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired will have the higher priority. You can also use a following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices: "Show Paired Phones" "Connect My Phone"
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or audio device within range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio Device follow these steps: 1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen. 2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Sources
button on the touchscreen. 3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear, press "Connect Phone". 4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.

DISCONNECTING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name.
4. The option's pop-up will be displayed. 5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen. 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.
DELETING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name for a different phone or audio device than the currently connected device.
4. The option's pop-up will be displayed. 5. Press the Delete Device button on the touchscreen. 6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings screen.

MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A FAVORITE
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the device name.
4. The option's pop-up will be displayed. 5. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list. 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE PHONE) -- IF EQUIPPED
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from the mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature.

See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones. To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in the "Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips" section. Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle. A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone. Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use. Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible. This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES
There are two ways you can add an entry to your Favorites. 1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that appears on the list. 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Contacts from the Phone main screen, and then select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow button next to the selected number to display the option's pop-up. In the pop-up, select "Add To Favorites". NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE
1. To remove a Favorite, select "Favorites" from the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the contact you want to remove from your favorites. This will bring up the options for that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) is available and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

MULTIMEDIA 299
WAYS TO INITIATE A PHONE CALL
Listed are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone. Redial Dial by pressing in the number Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back) Favorites Mobile Phonebook Recent Call Log SMS Message Viewer
DIAL BY SAYING A NUMBER
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin. 2. After the "Listening" prompt and the following beep,
say "Dial 151-123-4444". 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
CALL BY SAYING A PHONEBOOK NAME
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel to begin.
2. After the "Listening" prompt and the following beep, 9
say "Call John Doe Mobile." 3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers, it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe.

300 MULTIMEDIA
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call features: Answer End Ignore Hold/unhold Mute/unmute Transfer the call to/from the phone Swap two active calls Join two active calls together
TOUCH-TONE NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen. 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed. 4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press "Call". If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone End), press the VR button to send a touch-tone and say "Send 1234#" or you can say "Send Voicemail Password" if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook.

RECENT CALLS
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the following call types: All Calls Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls These can be accessed by pressing the recent calls button on the Phone main screen. You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel and say "Show my incoming calls" from any screen and the incoming calls will be displayed. NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with "Outgoing", "Recent", or "Missed".
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL -- NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel to accept the call. You can also press the Answer button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.

ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL -- CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel, answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call. NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be: "I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly." Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters. NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE: Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®. Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to "Toggling Between Calls" in this section. To combine two calls, refer to "Join Calls" in this section.

TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone End button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or push the VR button and after the "Listening" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial". The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF.

MULTIMEDIA 301

NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
BROWSING SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®. Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select SMS Reader using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls. The SMS Reader submenu allows the last 10 SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity

TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE PHONE

The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be

transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect

Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect

Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer button on the

Phone main screen.

302 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECT OR DISCONNECT LINK BETWEEN THE UCONNECT PHONE AND MOBILE PHONE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance: Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½-inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror. Always wait for the beep before speaking. Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you. Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period. Performance is maximized under: Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions

WARNING! ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many languages and accents, the system may not always work for some. NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero). Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.
FAR END AUDIO PERFORMANCE
Audio quality is maximized under: Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver's Seat

Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect Phone. Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the mobile phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON/ RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
CONNECTED SERVICES-- IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCTION TO SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM
One of the many benefits of your vehicle's Uconnect system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM GuardianTM connected vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM GuardianTM in your vehicle, you first need to activate SiriusXM® services.

WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE: SiriusXM GuardianTM involves the collection, transmission and use of data from your vehicle. Refer to "Data Collection and Privacy" in this section for further information.
What Is SiriusXM GuardianTM?
SiriusXM GuardianTM uses an embedded device in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center via wireless and landline communications networks. Depending on the type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM GuardianTM services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network compatible with your device. SiriusXM GuardianTM is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.

NOTE: Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect device, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas. Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM GuardianTM that may limit or prevent service delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical system or other important parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third parties or the government, Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or under a bridge. For a complete list of available SiriusXM GuardianTM services, please visit: US residents: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html. Canadian residents: https://www.driveuconnect.ca/
en/sirius-xm-guardian. Not all SiriusXM GuardianTM features are available for all models.

MULTIMEDIA 303
SiriusXM GuardianTM provides: The ability to remotely lock/unlock your doors using the
Uconnect App, by calling SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care, or by logging on to your owner site at www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (US Residents) or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). You can also remotely start your vehicle (if equipped) from virtually anywhere and activate your horn and lights via the app or owner site. Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map and send your locations directly to your Uconnect Navigation. The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of the Uconnect App. Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use Uconnect System and SiriusXM GuardianTM services. The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you directly to SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care for assistance in an emergency.
9

304 MULTIMEDIA
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM GuardianTM services starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM GuardianTM is required. The Uconnect system includes a trial* of SiriusXM GuardianTM services from your date of purchase. * Included Trials apply to new vehicles only. For a more complete description, please refer to DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to continue your services by visiting the SiriusXM GuardianTM Store or calling a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent at: US residents call: 1-844-796-4827 Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
GETTING STARTED WITH SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM GuardianTM in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM GuardianTM services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
3. Select "Customer Care" to speak with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web.
For further information, please visit: US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you're only a few steps away from using remote commands.

To use the Uconnect app: Once you have activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM
services, download the Uconnect app to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app. Once on the "Remote" screen, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped. Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation, if equipped. Press the "Settings" side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers. NOTE: For further information: US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/ sirius-xm-guardian.html Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
Using Your Owner's Site
Your Owner's Site website www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ owners-manual.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides you with all the information you need, all in one place. You can track your service history, find recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos about your vehicle's features, and easily access your user guides and manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM GuardianTM account.

This section will familiarize you with the key elements of the website that will help you get the most of your SiriusXM GuardianTM system. Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM GuardianTM account, such as your contact information, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM PIN, click on the "Edit Profile" button to access the details of your account. Connected Services Status: This statement will indicate your SiriusXM GuardianTM equipped vehicle. Remote Commands: For vehicles with an active SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription, press one of these icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn and lights. Editing Your Notifications Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM GuardianTM account. For example, any time you use your remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), or if your security alarm is set off, you can elect to receive a text message, push notifications, and/or E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, please follow these instructions. 1. Log on to your Owner's Account at www.mopar.com/
en-us/care/owners-manual.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). 2. Click the Edit Profile button. 3. Once there, you can edit Notification Preferences.

4. You can enter one mobile phone and/or E-mail address to notify you, and you can customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM
SOS Call
CAUTION! Some SiriusXM GuardianTM services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device.
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button

MULTIMEDIA 305
SiriusXM GuardianTM In-Vehicle Assistance Features With SiriusXM GuardianTM, your vehicle has on-board assistance features located on the rear view mirror designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support. Description SOS Call is a feature that, at the push of a button, can contact emergency services. It's a convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent in the event of an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit location information to SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care. In the event of a minor collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS button to be connected to a call center agent who can send emergency assistance to your vehicle's location. NOTE: Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
9

306 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
green indicating a call has been placed. NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
there is a 10 second delay before the SOS call is placed. The system will verbally alert you that a call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS Call button or press the Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10 seconds. During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired phone is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will go through mobile versus the hands-free system which is not available due to the SOS Call. 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent is made, the SOS Call system will connect your vehicle to a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent who will stay on the line with you. NOTE: Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center may be recorded or monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM GuardianTM services, you consent to being recorded.

SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services. In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased outside the United States and Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM GuardianTM services. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected: The SOS light will continuously be illuminated red. The screen will display the following message
"Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer." An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer." Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors: The ignition key has been removed from the ignition and the delayed accessories mode is active. The ignition key is in OFF position. The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.

The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion. Weather. Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason (including during or after an accident) the SOS Call System, among other vehicle systems, will not operate. Requirements This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the US. Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
GuardianTM System. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature. Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection compatible with your device. Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system.

WARNING! Never place anything on or near the vehicle's LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle's electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle's electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM SERVICES WILL NOT OPERATE. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properly and the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal to the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
(Continued)

WARNING! Ignoring the SOS light could mean you will not have
SOS Call services if needed. If the SOS light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
Roadside Assistance Call
SiriusXM GuardianTM In-Vehicle Assistance Features With SiriusXM GuardianTM, your vehicle has on-board assistance features located on the rear view mirror designed to enhance your driving experience if you should ever need assistance or support.

MULTIMEDIA 307

Description

Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system feature will contain an ASSIST button. Once your SiriusXM GuardianTM services have been activated, the ASSIST button can connect you directly to one of four important care centers for support.

Roadside Assistance Call -- If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, you'll be connected to someone who can help anytime. Additional fees may apply. (See the following Disclaimers section for more details.)

SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care -- Contact the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care call center to activate your services, renew after your trial has expired, and for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM GuardianTM system or help answering any general questions surrounding your connected services.

Uconnect Care Call -- In-vehicle support for all non-connected Uconnect system features, such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.

Vehicle Care Call -- Total support for your vehicle.

How It Works

You or someone in the vehicle simply presses the ASSIST

button and you will be presented with your ASSIST options

on the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the touchscreen.

308 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the
U.S. Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
GuardianTM system. Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM
and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature. Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Accessory) position with a properly functioning electrical system. Disclaimers If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM GuardianTM services to you, we may record and monitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care, whether such conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM GuardianTM services in your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.

Send & Go
Use the mobile app to easily search and send your locations directly to your vehicle navigation system. It's easy to enter and great for quick access on the go. Description The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App allows you to search for a destination on your mobile device, and then send the route to your vehicle's navigation system. How It Works 1. Use the Uconnect App to find the destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destination. After selecting the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App, browse through one of the categories provided, or type the name or keyword in the search box at the top of the App. You can also select categories such as Favorites or Contact List. 2. Select your destination from the list that appears. Location information will then be displayed on the map. From this screen, you will be able to: View the location on a map. See the distance from your current location. Send the address by selecting "Send to Vehicle"
from the mobile app. 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by pressing the Call button. 4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle by pressing the "Send To Vehicle" option on the pop-up that appears on the radio touchscreen.

Requirements Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM
and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Forget where you parked your car? We'll help you locate it! Simply use the Uconnect App on your smartphone and you'll be on track. Description The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App allows you to find the location of your stationary vehicle when you have lost it. You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make finding your vehicle even easier. How It Works Use the Uconnect App to find the location of your vehicle. 1. Select the "Location" tab at the bottom of the App.
Then touch the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle. 2. Choose how you want to view the information by
pressing the layers button. Three options will appear: Map Satellite Hybrid 3. You can also select the "Person" icon to see your location. 4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can map a route to your vehicle.

NOTE: You are responsible for using remote services that
sound horn and flash lights in accordance with the laws, rules and ordinances in effect at the location of your vehicle. Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in motion. Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
System. Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your device. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature. Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within 14 days.

Wi-Fi Hotspot -- If Equipped
Create A Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle Description Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects your device to the AT&T LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network that is ready
to go where ever you are. After you've made your purchase, turn on your device's Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
WARNING! The driver should NEVER use the Wi-Fi Hotspot while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time. Any Wi-Fi-enabled device -- such as a laptop or any
other portable enabled media can connect over your private in-vehicle network. A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your private network access the Web -- great for working and relaxing.

MULTIMEDIA 309

How It Works

The Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle passengers with an internet access hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other portable enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be activated any time within the first year of new vehicle ownership.

Give it a Try!

Purchase a subscription to the Wi-Fi Hotspot feature 3 different ways:

1. From your in-vehicle touchscreen select the Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the "How To Purchase" button and follow the on-screen instructions.

2. Log onto your owner site and click the link to the AT&T portal to get setup.

3. For existing Connect Car customers: Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist you.

Once the Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased you can change its

name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi App and

pressing the "Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot" button. You can also view the connected devices from the app screen by

pressing the "View Connected Devices" button.

310 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: A SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription is not required in order to purchase and use the Wi-Fi Hotspot.
WARNING! Always drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications in this vehicle when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving in serious injury or death.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to help recover it. You should contact local law enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once the report has been filed with law enforcement, you may notify SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care that you have filed the report. The SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. The vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) network connection and must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM with an active subscription that includes this feature. In addition, the vehicle must be within the United States.

How It Works 1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work with you to file a stolen vehicle report. 2. Next, inform SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care that your vehicle has been stolen. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care can be reached by: US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827 Canadian residents calling: 1-877-324-9091 The SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded the Uconnect App, you can push the "Settings" button on your device, select "ASSIST Call Centers," and then select "SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care" to make the call. 3. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care will authenticate that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen vehicle report. 4. SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care will work with your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you should also contact your insurance company to inform it of the situation.

Requirements Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
System. Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device. Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM
and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature. NOTE: Certain SiriusXM GuardianTM services are dependent on a properly installed and operational Uconnect system, cellular network availability that is compatible with the device in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM GuardianTM are available everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Lock Or Unlock Your Vehicle From Virtually Anywhere Using Your Computer, Mobile Device, Or SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care App. Description The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways: Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device From the your Owner's Site Contacting SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care

How It Works Uconnect App: 1. Download the Uconnect App to a compatible device
and login using your username and password. 2. To lock the doors, push the button with the Closed
Lock icon; to unlock the doors push the button with the Open Lock icon. 3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Enter the SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN on the keypad. 4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your command was sent (or not). 5. It will take a little while for the command to go through to your vehicle. The time it takes depends on a number of technical conditions. 6. A message will let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner's Site website: 1. Log on to your Owner's Site using the username and
password you used when activating your SiriusXM GuardianTM system. NOTE: If you forgot your username or password, links are provided on the website to help you retrieve them.

2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your Owner's Site, select the vehicle you want to send the command by clicking on its image along the top.
3. Push the Door Lock icon next to your vehicle information.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Please enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know if the command has been sent to your vehicle.

MULTIMEDIA 311

SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care:

1. If you need to unlock the doors of your vehicle, contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care by:

US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827

Canadian residents calling: 1-877-324-9091

2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking for your four-digit SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN.

3. After providing your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN, you can ask them to lock or unlock your vehicle. The agent will send a command to your vehicle to get the task done.

NOTE: Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN appropriately.

Requirements

Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM GuardianTM system.

Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G

(data) network connection. If using the Uconnect App to

command your vehicle, your device must be compat-

ible and be connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.

312 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM GuardianTM and have an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote Door Lock/ Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is on or during an emergency call.
NOTE: The SiriusXM GuardianTM Care agents are trained to help you with unlocking of your door (for example, in an accidental lock-out). All other Remote Services should be performed via your Owner's Site or through the Uconnect App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Use Your Computer or Wireless Device App to Start the Engine And Remotely Warm Up or Cool Down the Vehicle Description The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the ability to start the engine on your vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior before you have to get in. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of two ways: Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device. From the Your Owner Site website.

You can also send a command to turn off an engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off automatically. This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start system. You can set up notifications for your account push notifications every time a command is sent to Remote Start or cancel a Remote Start. How It Works SiriusXM GuardianTM For Uconnect App: 1. Download the Uconnect App to a compatible device
and login using your username and password. 2. To start the engine, press the "circular arrow." To turn
off an engine that has been remote started, press the circular arrow with an X in the middle button. 3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when your registered your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Enter the SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN on the keypad. 4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your command was sent (or not). 5. It will take a little while for the command to go through to your vehicle. The time it takes depends on a number of technical conditions. 6. A message will let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.

Your Owner Site website: 1. Log on to your Owner Site using the username and
password you used when activating your SiriusXM GuardianTM services in your vehicle. NOTE: If you forgot your username or password, links are provided on the website to help you retrieve them. 2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your Owner's Site, select the vehicle you want to send the command by clicking on its image along the top. 3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours, you will see a row of icons. On your dashboard you will see remote command icons. To start the engine, press the "circular arrow," to turn-off an engine that has been remote started press the Cancel button. 4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Please enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN. 5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.
NOTE: The SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agents are not trained for Remote Vehicle Start services.

Remote Horn & Lights
Can't Find Your Vehicle In The Parking Lot? Sound The Horn And Flash The Lights On Your Vehicle To Locate It Description It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of two ways: Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device. From your Owner's Site website. If you want, you can set up, push notifications every time a command is sent to turn on the horn and lights. Uconnect App: How It Works 1. Download the Uconnect App to a compatible device
and login using your username and password. 2. To turn on the horn and lights, press the Trumpet
icon. 3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM
GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Enter the SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN on the keypad. 4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your command was sent (or not). 5. It will take a little while for the command to go through to your vehicle. The time it takes depends on a number of technical conditions.

6. A message will let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.
Your Owner Site website: 1. Log on to your Owner's Site website using the
username and password you used when registering your SiriusXM GuardianTM system. If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them. 2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your
Owner's Site, select the vehicle you want to send the command by clicking on its image along the top. 3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours, you will see a row of icons. To turn on the horn and lights, press the Trumpet icon. To turn off the horn and lights, press the Trumpet icon again. NOTE: A quicker way to turn off your Remote Horn & Lights would be to push the Panic button on your Key Fob if you are near the vehicle. 4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN (this is the same four-digit code established when you activated your SiriusXM GuardianTM system). Please enter your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN. 5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know if the command was received by your vehicle.

MULTIMEDIA 313

NOTE: The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings when using this feature. You are responsible for compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.

Monthly Vehicle Health Report

Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service through which a summary of the performance of your vehicle's key systems will be sent to you every month so you can stay on top of your vehicle's maintenance needs. This is provided as a convenience to you and does not substitute for your regular maintenance to your vehicle.

In order to provide the monthly Vehicle Health Report, the Uconnect System in your vehicle may collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM GuardianTM and to FCA, such as your vehicle's health and performance, your vehicle's location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.

This data collection and transmission begins when you enroll in SiriusXM GuardianTM and will continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM GuardianTM subscription unless and until you call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care and tell us to deactivate your Uconnect system at:

US residents call: 1-844-796-4827

Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091

Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/ sirius-xm-guardian/privacy.html (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).

314 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem under the hood with one of your vehicle's key systems. For further information, go to your Owner's Site website. NOTE: Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register, and activate services. During this process you will be asked to provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
In-Vehicle Notifications -- If Equipped
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when services are needed, or to alert you of other important information, such as recall notices. When you receive a notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent. NOTE: Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen messages, or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill -- If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®! With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your vehicle and remotely access key services and features. If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa®.

If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands by saying: "Alexa®, ask <vehicle name> for help with my car." Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa®: "Alexa®, ask Jeep Wrangler to lock my car." "Alexa®, ask Dodge Challenger to start my car." "Alexa®, ask Chrysler Pacifica to drive to 1000 Chrysler
Dr, Auburn Hills, MI." "Alexa®, what's the traffic like in Detroit?" An activate subscription to SiriusXM GuardianTM is required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register for SiriusXM GuardianTM using the following steps: 1. Press the apps icon on the bottom bar of your
in-vehicle touchscreen. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps. 3. Select "Customer Care" to speak with a SiriusXM
GuardianTM Customer Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle, or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon Alexa®: 1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your mobile
device (Apple® or AndroidTM). 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS. 3. Search for Uconnect, then tap Enable. 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted. 5. Link Uconnect to the Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.

6. Log In using your Owner Account credentials. This will be the same user name and password you used when registering for Uconnect Access.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the Uconnect Skill.
You can now begin using the Uconnect Skill on Alexa®!
Drive Alerts-- If Equipped
Family Alerts helps promote safer driving and gives you peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road. You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle's location any time, any place. Use the Uconnect app to set alerts: Boundary Alert
Boundary Alert lets you know the moment your vehicle is driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that you set. Curfew Alert Curfew Alerts lets you know when your car is being driven outside of the curfew time. Speed Alert Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a speed limit you set. Valet Alert Valet Alerts lets you know if and when your vehicle is driven outside a quartermile radius of a valet drop-off zone.

SmartWatch Integration -- If Equipped
SmartWatch integration puts the Uconnect app right on your Apple® Watch or AndroidTM Wear. To get started, follow these steps: 1. Download the Uconnect app from the App Store® or
Google Play. 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you first set up your account. 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are connected through Bluetooth®. 4. The Uconnect app should appear on your SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features: Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock
button in the app and entering your security pin. Remote start or stop your vehicle. View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle
location, tire pressure warning, and more. For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel for SmartWatch integration.

MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM ACCOUNT
How To Manage My SiriusXM GuardianTM Account
To manage your SiriusXM GuardianTM account, press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care. NOTE: It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM GuardianTM Care to remove your personal data. For further assistance call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care: US residents call: 1-844-796-4827 Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM GuardianTM if you have an active subscription, push the ASSIST button on the rear view mirror and then select SiriusXM GuardianTM Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM GuardianTM. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM GuardianTM agent or held in a queue until an agent is available or go to your Owner's Site website. If you do not have an active subscription, push the ASSIST button and click the Activate button to activate services. You can also phone SiriusXM GuardianTM directly by: US calling: 1-844-796-4827 Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091

MULTIMEDIA 315
SIRIUSXM GUARDIANTM BUSINESS HOURS:
Central Time Monday through Friday 7:00 am to 10:00 pm Saturday 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call button on the mirror? You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle information, such as make and model, is transmitted along with the last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone else needs emergency assistance.
9

316 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE FAQS
1. What is the phone number for roadside assistance call? The phone number is: US: 1-800-521-2779 Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM GuardianTM, does it cover towing or other expenses incurred by using roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO FAQS
1. How long does it take to send the route and destination to my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message stating that you have a new route will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-message has a "Locations" option. Once "Locations" is selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent destinations.

CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER FAQS
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your vehicle may be located by anyone who has your PIN and access to your account. It is your responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and SiriusXM GuardianTM terms of service for more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red "Panic" button.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the door? Depending on various conditions, it can take up to three minutes or more for the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more quickly, however its range is limited and your Uconnect App comes in handy for these and other situations.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN are required for the activation of Remote services through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to protect your passwords and PINs.
4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is compatible with most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allows us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The Uconnect App relies on a mobile network connection from your device to send commands to your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection. If either your device or your vehicle is in an area with below average coverage, it may take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN & LIGHTS FAQS
1. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the lights quicker; however its range is limited.

3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will continue for 20 seconds.
4. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM GuardianTM account? Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror. Press the Activate button on the touchscreen. Select "Call Care" to speak with a SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care agent or select "Enter Email" to activate on the web. If you choose to enter your email address, you will then confirm your email address. You will receive an email with an activation link that will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the activation link, you will be prompted to fill out your information and accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM GuardianTM home page to complete your profile and demo the remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an email address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM GuardianTM. Customers need to register so they can subscribe to receive additional services and create a SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN for remote command requests.

3. How do I create a SiriusXM GuardianTM security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN during the registration process. The SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN will be required to authenticate you when accessing your account via SiriusXM GuardianTM Call or performing any remote services, such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM GuardianTM security PIN? If you've already activated services and forgot your SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner's Site. You can also call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
5. How do I update my SiriusXM GuardianTM payment account address? Your SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account address can be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care from ASSIST in your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM GuardianTM profile? Your name, home address, phone number, email address and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN can be updated online on your Owner's Site. Log in to your Owner's Site then select Edit Profile to edit your personal information. Make your edits and click Save.

MULTIMEDIA 317

7. Can I try features or packages before I buy them? Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an included trial period for certain Apps and services. For more information, please contact SiriusXM GuardianTM:

US call: 1-844-796-4827

Canada call: 1-877-324-9091

8. Can I access every App and service while driving? No, some applications and services are not available while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).

9. What happens when my subscription comes up for renewal? If you have added a credit card to your account information, your subscription will be automatically renewed for a term length in accordance with the service plan that you have selected at the then current subscription rate and on every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM GuardianTM Care. If you have not added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM GuardianTM will send you an email or letter in advance of your expiration date to remind you that your subscription is ending soon.

10. How do I manage my SiriusXM GuardianTM notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM

Customer Care, or go to your Owner's Site and then

update your preferences on the SiriusXM GuardianTM

customer web portal.

11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.

318 MULTIMEDIA
12. How do I update my credit card information? Login to your Owner's Site, and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM GuardianTM Payment Account, or call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my subscription? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care at: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091 You also can visit your Owner's Site and choose a subscription to view its expiration date. When your subscription is about to expire, you will receive an email or letter notification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire subscription? Pro rata refunds are provided from the date of cancellation for annual plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM GuardianTM Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing plans of other lengths and other circumstances. Or, for more information, call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care at: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091

15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your subscription will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a monthly subscription, your subscription will be canceled on the last day of the month in which you choose to cancel. For other subscriptions, please call SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care at: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you'll want to remove your account information. This process removes all personal information, returns the Uconnect system to its original factory settings, removes all SiriusXM GuardianTM services and account information. To remove your account information from the Uconnect system, contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care at: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
17. What if I forgot to remove my account information before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM GuardianTM Customer Care: US call: 1-844-796-4827 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091

18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection compatible with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Services that required your smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if you have an operable network.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE START FAQS
1. How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it can take three minutes or more for the request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more quickly. However its range is limited. For example, when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you can use the Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get to it.

3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device? People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which is why security measures have been engineered into the Uconnect App. Asking for your username, password and SiriusXM GuardianTM Security PIN help to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to find your device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts the engine to warm up or cool down the interior before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the vehicle.
6. Why can't all mobile devices use the Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been designed to work on most devices with the Apple® and AndroidTM operating systems. The capabilities of these devices allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other operating systems may be supported in the future.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

MULTIMEDIA 319
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.). The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will "Seek Up" for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will "Seek Down" for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.
9

320 MULTIMEDIA
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center console. This feature allows an external device to be plugged into the USB or AUX ports.

1 -- USB Port 2 -- AUX Jack

Center Console USB Port

If equipped, there may also be another USB port located on the back of the center console. The USB port allows interaction with a connected smartphone via Android AutoTM or Apple CarPlay® if the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 4/4C NAV.

Rear USB Port
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
USA/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 4, or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.

MULTIMEDIA 321
Uconnect 4
9
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system.

322 MULTIMEDIA
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel. Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from the current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons 1 -- Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send, Or Receive A Text 2 -- For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV System Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function 3 -- Push To End Call
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: "Cancel" to stop a current voice session "Help" to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands "Repeat" to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

RADIO
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: "Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM" "Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1" TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button and say "Help". The system provides you with a list of commands.
MEDIA
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. "Change source to Bluetooth®" "Change source to AUX" "Change source to USB" "Play artist Beethoven"; "Play album Greatest Hits";
"Play song Moonlight Sonata"; "Play genre Classical"

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the VR button or Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands: "Call John Smith" "Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts" "Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)" "Call back (call previous incoming phone number)" TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR button or Phone button and say "Call", then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "Call John Smith work".

VOICE TEXT REPLY -- IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the

VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say "Listen". (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system).

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the VR button or Phone button After the beep, say: "Reply".

(if enabled).

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

Stuck in traffic. See you later.

No.

Start without me.

I'll be late.

Okay. Call me.

Where are you? Are you there
yet?

I will be 5 <or 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60> minutes late.

I'll call you later.
I'm on my way. I'm lost.

I need directions. Can't talk right
now.

See you in 5 <or 10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60> minutes. Thanks.

MULTIMEDIA 323

NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or higher supports reading incoming text messages only. TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
CLIMATE

Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control).

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

"Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees"

"Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees" TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust

the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command

will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel

if equipped.

324 MULTIMEDIA
NAVIGATION (4C NAV) -- IF EQUIPPED
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when the system shows you exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say: "Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan".
2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a Point Of Interest (POI) search, push the VR button . After the beep, say: "Find nearest coffee shop".
SIRI® EYES FREE -- IF EQUIPPED
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests.

USING DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. Automatic reply messages can be: "I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly". Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. NOTE: Only the beginning of your custom message will be
seen on the touchscreen. Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®. Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.

ANDROID AUTOTM -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android AutoTM features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Android AutoTM allows you to use your voice to interact with Android'sTM best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your AndroidTM-powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your AndroidTM 6.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android AutoTM icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Android AutoTM. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the "Microphone" icon within Android AutoTM, to activate Android'sTM VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone's features: Maps Music Phone Text Messages Additional Apps NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running AndroidTM 6.0 or higher and download app on Google Play. AndroidTM, Android AutoTM, and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

APPLE CARPLAY® -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay® features may or may not be available in every region and/or language. Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle's voice recognition system, and use your smartphone's data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your "Phone" icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the "Home" button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your iPhone's® features: Phone Music Messages Maps -- If Equipped Additional Apps -- If Equipped NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

MULTIMEDIA 325
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. AndroidTM is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Uconnect System Support: US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) SiriusXM GuardianTM services support: US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/ sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827 Canadian residents visit https://www.driveuconnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
9

326
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: Owner's name and address Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office) Authorized dealer name Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
IN MEXICO CONTACT
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D F. In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300 Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568

PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (877) 426-5337 Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.

The Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.
WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 327
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND WASHINGTON, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
10

328 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer, or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

IN CANADA If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and equipment. Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency, and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities, and safety tips. Call toll free at: 1-800-890-4038 (US) 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: www.techauthority.com (US)

329
INDEX

A Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control).......... 148 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 228 Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 253 Air Bag........................................................................... 103
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 104 Air Bag Warning Light ....................................102, 105 Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 108 Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 111, 215 Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 215 Front Air Bag ........................................................... 105 If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 110 Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 108 Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 114 Maintenance ........................................................... 114 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 103 Side Air Bags ........................................................... 108 Transporting Pets.................................................... 124 Air Bag Light ........................................................ 102, 125 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 222 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 222 Air Conditioner Refrigerant................................. 222, 223 Air Conditioner System ................................................ 222 Air Conditioning ...............................................................47 Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 49, 223 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................48 Air Filter......................................................................... 222 Air Pressure Tires ......................................................................... 239

Alarm Arm The System......................................................... 17 Disarm The System ................................................... 17 Security Alarm..................................................... 17, 73
Alarm System Security Alarm............................................................ 17
Alexa ..............................................................................314 Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8 Amazon Alexa................................................................314 Android Auto..................................................................324 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 228, 255
Disposal ...................................................................229 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................... 80 Anti-Lock Warning Light.................................................. 73 Apple CarPlay ................................................................325 Arming System
Security Alarm............................................................ 17 Assist, Hill Start............................................................... 85 Audio Settings...............................................................285 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................257 Auto Down Power Windows............................................49 Auto Up Power Windows ................................................ 49 Automatic Dimming Mirror............................................. 31 Automatic Door Locks ....................................................21 Automatic Headlights ..................................................... 34 Automatic High Beams................................................... 34 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 48 Automatic Transaxle.....................................................136

Automatic Transmission .............................................. 137 Adding Fluid....................................................231, 256 Fluid And Filter Change........................................... 231 Fluid Change ........................................................... 231 Fluid Level Check .................................................... 231 Fluid Type .......................................................231, 256 Special Additives..................................................... 231
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ................. 21 Aux Mode ...................................................................... 289 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 58 Axle Fluid....................................................................... 256 Axle Lubrication ............................................................ 256

Battery.................................................................... 71, 220

Charging System Light.............................................. 71

Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 11

Belts, Seat..................................................................... 125

Blind Spot Monitoring .................................................... 86

Bluetooth

Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the

Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ................. 302

Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or

Audio Device After Pairing................................. 298

Bluetooth Mode............................................................ 290

Body Mechanism Lubrication ...................................... 223

B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 236

Brake Assist System....................................................... 81 Brake Control System, Electronic.................................. 81

Brake Fluid.................................................................... 256

Brake System ............................................................... 230

330
Fluid Check.....................................................230, 256 Master Cylinder....................................................... 230 Parking .................................................................... 130 Warning Light .............................................................70 Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 137 Brightness, Interior Lights .......................................35, 36 Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 184 Bulbs, Light................................................................... 126
C Camera, Rear ............................................................... 167 Capacities, Fuel............................................................ 255 Caps, Filler
Fuel .......................................................................... 168 Oil (Engine).....................................................219, 221 Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 229 Car Washes .................................................................. 248 Carbon Monoxide Warning ................................. 124, 254 Cargo Area Cover ............................................................55 Cargo Load Floor.............................................................55 Cargo Tie-Downs ......................................................55, 56 Cellular Phone .............................................................. 320 Certification Label........................................................ 169 Chains, Tire................................................................... 244 Change Oil Indicator .......................................................65 Changing A Flat Tire ............................................199, 232 Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 233 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........79 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 124 Checks, Safety.............................................................. 124 Child Restraint.............................................................. 115 Child Restraints Booster Seats.......................................................... 117 Child Seat Installation ............................................ 123

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................121 Infant And Child Restraints.....................................116 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............118 Older Children And Child Restraints.......................117 Seating Positions.....................................................118 Child Safety Locks .......................................................... 22 Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................252 Cleaning Wheels .....................................................................247 Windshield Wiper Blades ........................................223 Climate Control ............................................................... 38 Automatic................................................................... 42 Manual ....................................................................... 38 Coin Holder .....................................................................57 Cold Weather Operation...............................................128 Compact Spare Tire ......................................................243 Computer, Trip/Travel ....................................................70 Connector Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).......................320 Console............................................................................ 57 Floor ........................................................................... 57 Contract, Service ..........................................................327 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................229 Cooling System .............................................................227 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................228 Coolant Level ................................................. 227, 229 Cooling Capacity ......................................................255 Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................229 Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................227 Inspection ................................................................229 Points To Remember...............................................229 Pressure Cap ...........................................................229 Radiator Cap............................................................229 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........ 228, 255, 256 Corrosion Protection.....................................................247

Cruise Light....................................................... 76, 77, 78 Cupholders...................................................................... 58 Customer Assistance ................................................... 326 Cybersecurity ................................................................ 257
D Daytime Running Lights.......................................... 33, 34 Dealer Service .............................................................. 221 Defroster, Windshield .................................................. 125 Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................................... 78 Dimmer Switch
Headlight ............................................................ 33, 34 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 220 Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 213 Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).................................... 229 Disturb........................................................................... 300 Do Not Disturb .............................................................. 324 Door Ajar .................................................................. 71, 72 Door Ajar Light ......................................................... 71, 72 Driver's Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 23 Driving ........................................................................... 177
E Easy Entry Seats............................................................. 27 Electric Brake Control System ....................................... 81
Anti-Lock Brake System............................................ 80 Traction Control System ........................................... 81 Electric Parking Brake.................................................. 130 Electrical Power Outlets ................................................. 58 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................. 146 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................. 82 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ..................... 71

Emergency Gas Can Refueling.................................... 210 Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher......................................... 180 Jacking............................................................199, 232 Jump Starting.......................................................... 208 Tow Hooks............................................................... 214 Towing ..................................................................... 213 Emission Control System Maintenance.........................79 Engine ........................................................................... 219 Air Cleaner............................................................... 222 Block Heater ........................................................... 129 Break-In Recommendations .................................. 130 Checking Oil Level .................................................. 220 Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................................ 256 Cooling..................................................................... 227 Exhaust Gas Caution .....................................124, 254 Fails To Start ........................................................... 129 Flooded, Starting .................................................... 129 Jump Starting.......................................................... 208 Oil...........................................................221, 255, 256 Oil Filler Cap ................................................... 219, 221 Oil Filter ................................................................... 222 Oil Selection ................................................... 221, 255 Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 221 Overheating............................................................. 210 Starting .................................................................... 127 Engine Oil Viscosity ...................................................... 221 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ............................................ 221 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............. 111, 215 Ethanol.......................................................................... 252 Exhaust Gas Cautions......................................... 124, 254 Exhaust System................................................... 124, 226 Exterior Lighting ..............................................................33 Exterior Lights........................................................ 33, 126

F Family Alerts..................................................................314 Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................222 Air Conditioning ................................................49, 223 Engine Oil....................................................... 222, 256 Engine Oil Disposal..................................................222 Flashers Hazard Warning.......................................................180 Turn Signals ........................................33, 35, 77, 126 Flash-To-Pass........................................................... 33, 34 Flat Tire Changing............................................... 232, 243 Flat Tire Stowage ................................................ 232, 243 Flooded Engine Starting ...............................................129 Floor Console .................................................................. 57 Fluid Capacities ............................................................255 Fluid Leaks ....................................................................126 Fluid Level Checks Brake ........................................................................ 230 Engine Oil.................................................................220 Fluid, Brake ...................................................................256 Fluids And Lubricants...................................................256 Fog Lights ................................................................. 33, 35 Fold-Flat Seats ................................................................ 23 Folding Rear Seats ......................................................... 25 Forward Collision Warning ............................................. 90 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................212 Fuel ................................................................................ 252 Additives...................................................................253 Clean Air...................................................................252 Ethanol .....................................................................252 Filler Cap (Gas Cap).................................................168 Gasoline ...................................................................252 Light............................................................................ 74 Materials Added ......................................................253

331
Methanol ................................................................. 252 Octane Rating.................................................252, 256 Specifications.......................................................... 256 Tank Capacity.......................................................... 255 Fuses............................................................................. 191
G Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................. 168 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................................ 252 Gasoline, Clean Air ....................................................... 252 Gasoline, Reformulated ............................................... 252 Gear Ranges ........................................................134, 138 Gear Selector Override................................................. 211 Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 250 Gross Axle Weight Rating............................................. 170 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ....................................... 170 GVWR ............................................................................ 169
H Hazard Warning Flashers............................................. 180 Head Restraints.............................................................. 28 Head Rests ..................................................................... 28 Headlights....................................................................... 33
Automatic .................................................................. 34 Cleaning................................................................... 248 Delay .......................................................................... 34 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ............... 33, 34 Lights On Reminder ........................................... 33, 34 Passing ............................................................... 33, 34 Switch ........................................................................ 33 Time Delay.......................................................... 33, 34
Heated Mirrors ........................................................ 31, 32 11
Heater, Engine Block.................................................... 129 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch........... 34

332
Hill Descent Control ........................................................84 Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................................84 Hill Start Assist ................................................................85 Holder, Coin.....................................................................57 Holder, Cup......................................................................58 Hood Prop........................................................................53 Hood Release ..................................................................53
I Ignition .............................................................................13
Switch .........................................................................13 In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ...................................................... 9 Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 31, 180 Instrument Cluster ............................................61, 63, 65
Descriptions ...............................................................77 Display ..........................................................63, 64, 65 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 250 Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 249 Interior Fuses ............................................................... 195 Interior Lights ..................................................................35 Introduction ....................................................................... 7 Inverter Power..........................................................................59 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...................................... 288, 320
J Jack Location................................................................ 199 Jack Operation ...........................................199, 200, 232 Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 200 Jump Starting ............................................................... 208

K Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ........................................................... 17 Disarm The Alarm...................................................... 17 Programming Additional Key Fobs .................... 12, 17 Remote Keyless Entry ............................................... 10 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 11 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............ 12 Key-In Reminder .............................................................13 Keyless Enter-N-Go.................................................. 10, 19 Keys ................................................................................. 10 Replacement ...................................................... 12, 16
L Lane Change And Turn Signals............................... 33, 35 Lane Change Assist ................................................. 33, 35 LaneSense ....................................................................163 Lap/Shoulder Belts ........................................................ 97 Latches .......................................................................... 126
Hood ........................................................................... 53 Leaks, Fluid ...................................................................126 Life Of Tires ...................................................................241 Liftgate ..................................................................... 53, 54 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer..................................... 38 Light Bulbs ....................................................................126 Lights .............................................................................126
Air Bag............................................................ 102, 125 Automatic Headlights................................................ 34 Battery Saver .............................................................35 Brake Assist Warning ................................................ 84 Brake Warning ........................................................... 70 Bulb Replacement...................................................184 Cruise ........................................................... 76, 77, 78 Daytime Running................................................ 33, 34

Dimmer Switch, Headlight................................. 33, 34 Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ............ 72 Exterior..................................................................... 126 Fog ............................................................................. 35 Headlight Switch ....................................................... 33 Headlights.................................................................. 33 High Beam ................................................................. 34 High Beam/Low Beam Select ........................... 33, 34 Hill Descent Control Indicator .................................. 84 Instrument Cluster .................................................... 33 Intensity Control ................................................. 35, 36 Interior ....................................................................... 35 Lights On Reminder ........................................... 33, 34 Low Fuel..................................................................... 74 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..................... 74 Park............................................................................ 77 Passing ............................................................... 33, 34 Seat Belt Reminder................................................... 72 Security Alarm ........................................................... 73 Service ..................................................................... 184 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............................. 92 Traction Control......................................................... 84 Turn Signals........................................ 33, 35, 77, 126 Vanity Mirror .............................................................. 33 Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........ 72, 77 Load Floor, Cargo ........................................................... 55 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................................... 69 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................................... 69 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction........................... 69 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ........................... 69 Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 169 Tires ......................................................................... 236

Locks Auto Unlock ................................................................21 Child Protection .........................................................22 Power Door.................................................................19
Low Tire Pressure System ..............................................92 Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 223 Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 251 Luggage Carrier...............................................................60
M Maintenance ...................................................................52 Maintenance Free Battery........................................... 220 Maintenance Schedule................................................ 216 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................74 Manual
Service..................................................................... 328 Manual Transmission ......................................... 133, 230
Fluid Level Check.................................................... 230 Frequency Of Fluid Change.................................... 231 Lubricant Selection................................................. 230 Shift Speeds............................................................ 134 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ..................................22 Memory Seat ...................................................................22 Memory Settings .............................................................22 Methanol ...................................................................... 252 Mini-Trip Computer .........................................................70 Mirrors .............................................................................31 Automatic Dimming ...................................................31 Heated.................................................................31, 32 Outside .......................................................................31 Rearview........................................................... 31, 180 Vanity ..........................................................................33

Modifications/Alterations Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System....................................... 92 Mopar Parts ..................................................................327 Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 33
N New Vehicle Break-In Period........................................130
O Occupant Restraints....................................................... 95 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 252, 256 Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................222 Oil Filter, Selection........................................................222 Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 72 Oil, Engine ........................................................... 221, 256
Capacity ...................................................................255 Change Interval .......................................................221 Checking ..................................................................220 Dipstick ....................................................................220 Disposal ...................................................................222 Filter ............................................................... 222, 256 Filter Disposal..........................................................222 Identification Logo...................................................221 Materials Added To .................................................221 Pressure Warning Light............................................. 72 Recommendation.......................................... 221, 255 Synthetic ..................................................................221 Viscosity ......................................................... 221, 255 Onboard Diagnostic System........................................... 78 Operating Precautions....................................................78

333 Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ................................................. 8, 328 Outlet
Power ......................................................................... 58 Outside Rearview Mirrors .............................................. 31 Overheating, Engine ..................................................... 210 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual).................................8 P Paddle Shifters ............................................................. 140 Paint Care ..................................................................... 247 Parking Brake ............................................................... 130 ParkSense System, Rear ............................................. 159 Personalized Main Menu Bar ...................................... 302 Pets ............................................................................... 124 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 236 Power
Door Locks................................................................. 19 Inverter ...................................................................... 59 Liftgate....................................................................... 54 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)............................. 58 Sunroof ...................................................................... 50 Windows .................................................................... 49 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................................ 101 Preparation For Jacking ............................................... 200 Pretensioners Seat Belts ................................................................ 101
11

334
R Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 240 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 229 Radio
Presets..................................................................... 282 Radio Operation .................................................. 281, 320 Radio Remote Controls................................................ 319 Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................37 Rear Camera ................................................................ 167 Rear Cross Path ..............................................................89 Rear ParkSense System .............................................. 159 Rear Seats, Folding.........................................................25 Rear Wiper/Washer ........................................................38 Recreational Towing .................................................... 176 Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 252 Refrigerant.................................................................... 223 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 304 Release, Hood .................................................................53 Reminder, Lights On ................................................33, 34 Reminder, Seat Belt........................................................96 Remote Control
Starting System..........................................................14 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ................ 310, 316 Remote Features, Horn And Lights............................. 313 Remote Features, Starting ................................. 312, 318 Remote Keyless Entry.....................................................10
Arm The Alarm............................................................17 Disarm The Alarm ......................................................17 Programming Additional Key Fobs ....................12, 17 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control...................... 319 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode ............................................15 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .........15 Uconnect Settings......................................................15 Remote Starting System.................................................14

Removing SiriusXM Guardian ......................................315 Replacement Keys................................................... 12, 16 Replacement Tires........................................................242 Reporting Safety Defects .............................................327 Restraints, Child ...........................................................115 Restraints, Head .............................................................28 Roadside Assistance .......................................... 307, 316 Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 8 Roof Type Carrier ............................................................ 60 Rotation, Tires...............................................................244
S Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................................125 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................126 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................327 Safety Information, Tire................................................232 Safety Tips.....................................................................124 Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................124 Schedule, Maintenance ...............................................216 Seat Belt Reminder ........................................................ 72 Seat Belts ...............................................................96, 125
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................................... 99 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................... 99 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ............ 99 Child Restraints .......................................................115 Energy Management Feature .................................101 Extender ...................................................................100 Front Seat .................................................... 96, 97, 98 Inspection ................................................................125 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................... 98 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .................................. 98 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................................... 97 Operating Instructions............................................... 98 Pregnant Women.....................................................101

Pretensioners .......................................................... 101 Rear Seat................................................................... 97 Reminder ................................................................... 96 Seat Belt Extender .................................................. 100 Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 101 Untwisting Procedure................................................ 98 Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 249 Seats ............................................................................... 23 Adjustment ................................................................ 23 Easy Entry .................................................................. 27 Head Restraints ........................................................ 28 Heated ....................................................................... 27 Memory...................................................................... 22 Rear Folding ....................................................... 23, 25 Seatback Release ..................................................... 25 Tilting ......................................................................... 23 Ventilated .................................................................. 28 Security Alarm ......................................................... 17, 73 Arm The System ........................................................ 17 Disarm The System................................................... 17 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................................ 256 Send & Go............................................................308, 316 Sentry Key Key Programming...................................................... 17 Sentry Key (Immobilizer)................................................ 16 Sentry Key Replacement ........................................ 12, 16 Service Assistance ....................................................... 326 Service Contract ........................................................... 327 Service Manuals........................................................... 328 Shift Lever Override...................................................... 211 Shifting Automatic Transmission ......................................... 137 Manual Transmission ............................................. 133 Shoulder Belts ................................................................ 97 Side View Mirror Adjustment ......................................... 31

Signals, Turn............................................ 33, 35, 77, 126 Siri ................................................................................. 324 Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 283
Favorites.................................................................. 284 Replay...................................................................... 284 SiriusXM Guardian FAQ ............................................... 315 SiriusXM Guardian Trial Period ................................... 304 SiriusXM Guardian, Getting Started............................ 304 SiriusXM Guardian, Introduction................................. 302 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Browse in SXM ........................................................ 284 Favorites.................................................................. 284 Replay...................................................................... 284 Smart Watch................................................................. 315 Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 244 Snow Tires .................................................................... 243 SOS Call ............................................................... 305, 315 Spare Tires .......................................................... 243, 244 Spark Plugs .................................................................. 256 Specifications Fuel (Gasoline)........................................................ 256 Oil............................................................................. 256 Speed Control Cancel...................................................................... 147 Distance Setting (ACC Only) ................................... 148 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........................................ 148 Resume ................................................................... 147 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ................................... 146 Starting .................................................................. 14, 127 Automatic Transmission......................................... 127 Button .........................................................................13 Cold Weather .......................................................... 128 Engine Fails To Start............................................... 129 Remote .......................................................................14 Starting And Operating ................................................ 127

Starting Procedures......................................................127 Steering
Column Controls........................................................ 33 Tilt Column................................................................. 30 Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 30 Wheel, Tilt .................................................................. 30 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................319 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls .....319 Stolen Vehicle Assistance ............................................310 Storage ............................................................................ 57 Storage, Vehicle.............................................................. 48 Store Radio Presets......................................................282 Stuck, Freeing ...............................................................212 Sun Roof................................................................... 50, 52 Sun Visor ......................................................................... 33 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag..................103 Sway Control, Trailer....................................................... 86 Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................221 System, Remote Starting ............................................... 14
T Telescoping Steering Column ........................................ 30 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 48 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ........................................... 55, 56 Tilt Steering Column ....................................................... 30 Time Delay
Headlight............................................................. 33, 34 Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................236 Tire Markings ................................................................232 Tire Safety Information.................................................232 Tire Service Kit..............................................................203 Tires ...................................................126, 239, 243, 245
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................................241 Air Pressure..............................................................239

335

Chains ...................................................................... 244

Changing.........................................................199, 232

Compact Spare........................................................ 243

General Information.......................................239, 243

High Speed .............................................................. 240

Inflation Pressure.................................................... 239

Jacking............................................................199, 232

Life Of Tires ............................................................. 241

Load Capacity.......................................................... 236

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................ 75, 92

Quality Grading........................................................ 245

Radial....................................................................... 240

Replacement ........................................................... 242

Rotation ................................................................... 244

Safety..............................................................232, 239

Sizes......................................................................... 233

Snow Tires ............................................................... 243

Spare Tires .....................................................243, 244

Spinning................................................................... 241

Trailer Towing .......................................................... 174

Tread Wear Indicators ............................................ 241

Wheel Nut Torque ................................................... 251

To Open Hood ................................................................. 53

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight..................................... 172

Tow Hooks

Emergency............................................................... 214

Towing ........................................................................... 170

Disabled Vehicle...................................................... 213

Guide........................................................................ 172

Recreational ............................................................ 176

Weight...................................................................... 172

Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 176 Traction Control .............................................................. 81

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................................. 86

Trailer Towing ............................................................... 170

336 Cooling System Tips................................................ 175 Minimum Requirements ........................................ 173 Tips .......................................................................... 175 Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 172 Wiring....................................................................... 174
Trailer Towing Guide .................................................... 172 Trailer Weight ............................................................... 172 Transaxle
Automatic ................................................................ 136 Operation................................................................. 136 Transfer Case Fluid ......................................................................... 256 Transmission ................................................................ 137 Automatic ....................................................... 137, 231 Fluid ......................................................................... 256 Maintenance ........................................................... 231 Manual .................................................................... 133 Transporting Pets......................................................... 124 Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 241 Turn Signals.......................................................33, 35, 77

U Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ................................301 Phone Call Features ................................................299 Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone.................................................302 Uconnect Settings ..................................................... 15 Uconnect App................................................................304 Uconnect Phone ........................................ 296, 297, 298 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call --
Call Currently In Progress ..................................300 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call --
No Call Currently In Progress.............................300 Bluetooth Communication Link..............................302 Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ........................299 Call Continuation .....................................................301 Call Controls.............................................................300 Call Termination ......................................................301 Cancel Command ....................................................296 Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ..........302 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............................298 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device .........................298 Dial By Saying A Number ........................................299 Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ...............298 Far End Audio Performance....................................302 Help Command........................................................296

Join Calls.................................................................. 301 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 298 Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress ..................................................... 301 Managing Your Favorites........................................ 299 Natural Speech ....................................................... 296 Operation................................................................. 295 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 296 Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ............. 297 Pair Additional Mobile Phones ............................... 297 Phonebook Download............................................. 298 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................ 301 Power-Up.................................................................. 302 Recent Calls ............................................................ 300 Redial....................................................................... 301 To Remove A Favorite ............................................. 299 Toggling Between Calls........................................... 301 Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 300 Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone.............. 301 Voice Command ...................................................... 302 Ways To Initiate A Phone Call................................. 299 Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features ......................... 15 Uconnect Voice Command .......................................... 321 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 245 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ......... 320 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................................... 98

V Vanity Mirrors ..................................................................33 Vehicle Finder...................................................... 308, 316 Vehicle Health Alert ..................................................... 314 Vehicle Health Report .................................................. 313 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 251 Vehicle Loading................................................... 169, 236 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................................... 8 Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 314 Vehicle Security Alarm ....................................................17 Vehicle Storage ...............................................................48 Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................................. 9 Navigation .................................................................... 9 Operating Instructions................................................. 9 Searching User Guide.................................................. 9 Ventilated Seats..............................................................28 Viscosity, Engine Oil ..................................................... 221 Voice Recognition System (VR) ................................... 321

W Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....... 73 Warnings And Cautions .................................................... 8 Warnings, Roll Over .......................................................... 8 Warranty Information ...................................................327 Washers, Windshield.............................................36, 220 Washing Vehicle ...........................................................248 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................247 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ..........................................247 Wi-fi ................................................................................ 309 Wind Buffeting ......................................................... 50, 52 Window Fogging.............................................................. 48 Windows .......................................................................... 49
Close........................................................................... 49 Down .......................................................................... 49 Open ........................................................................... 49 Power ......................................................................... 49 Up ............................................................................... 49

337 Windshield Defroster ................................................... 125 Windshield Washers ............................................. 36, 220
Fluid ......................................................................... 220 Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 223 Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 36 Wipers Blade Replacement ......................................... 223 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 37

The driver's primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver's responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

Whether it's providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle's heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you'll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword "JEEP" (U.S. residents only).

20_MP_OM_EN_USC_N Third Edition V2

U. S. mopar.com/om

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER'S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS

Canada owners.mopar.ca

© 2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

References

Adobe PDF Library 15.0